JP7061374B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There is a gaming machine that is provided with lighting means for illuminating the inside of the housing and can appropriately and quickly perform work inside the housing even when installed in a game hall with dark lighting.

JP-A-2007-97982

It was necessary to provide lighting means, lighting control means, etc. for lighting inside the housing.
In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving workability in a gaming machine installation environment with a simple configuration.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine is arranged on the back side with a gap between the liquid crystal display device arranged so that the display unit faces the front side, the first substrate arranged on the back side, and the first substrate. A second substrate to be made, and the like. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal panel, a backlight that serves as a light source for the liquid crystal panel, and a housing that allows the liquid crystal panel to face from a front opening and accommodates the backlight . The light of the backlight faces through the gap between the first substrate and the second substrate.

According to one aspect, in a gaming machine, workability in a gaming machine installation environment can be improved with a simple configuration.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during change in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of 2nd Embodiment, and the mounting base which supports a game control device by a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure (4) which shows an example of the direction of the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. FIG. 5 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the resistance mounted on the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and the corresponding part number. It is a figure which shows an example of the component provided on the component mounting surface of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the mounting base which supports a game control device by a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the orientation of the game control board of the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment, and the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the integrated circuit, the connector, and the resistance on the game control board of 3rd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted on the game control board. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the line TL of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the component placement area and the non-component placement area located between the integrated circuit and the connector on the game control board of the modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control device of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state display device which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for a base. It is a figure which shows the display example by the state display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 5 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 6 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 7 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 8 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 9 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the test circuit arrangement area, the test connector arrangement area, the input signal circuit arrangement area, and the input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (part non-mounting) of the 5th Embodiment. be. The figure which shows an example of the test circuit arrangement area, the test connector arrangement area, the input signal circuit arrangement area, and the input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (part mounting at the time of a test) of 5th Embodiment. Is. The figure which shows an example of the test circuit arrangement area, the test connector arrangement area, the input signal circuit arrangement area, and the input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (part mounting at the time of mass production) of 5th Embodiment. Is. It is a figure which shows an example of the power-source pattern and the ground pattern in which the bypass capacitor of 5th Embodiment is installed. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the substrate and the harness of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the two boards arranged side by side in the horizontal direction of 6th Embodiment, and the harness which connects two boards. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the two boards arranged side by side in the vertical direction of 6th Embodiment, and the harness which connects two boards. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the harness which connects two boards which the direction of the connector of 6th Embodiment is different and the connector does not face each other, and the two boards are connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the harness which connects two boards which the connector of 6th Embodiment has the same direction but has a large offset, and the connector does not face each other, and the two boards are connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the two boards which connect the two boards with the two boards which only a part of a connector faces each other by the offset of the 6th Embodiment which the direction of a connector is the same. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview by the side observation of the substrate and the harness of the modification 1 of the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview by the side observation of the substrate and the harness of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the external information terminal board of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the external information terminal board of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation state of the external information terminal of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the arrangement example of the external information terminal and other parts of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows the arrangement example of the external information terminal and other parts of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the photocoupler and resistance of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the external information terminal board of the modification 2 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal display device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the cross section which passes through one of the lower slits in a liquid crystal display device, a game control device, and an effect control device. It is a figure which shows an example of the cable routing of the game control device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the slit irradiation target of the modification 2 of the 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25 around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25.
a is provided, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can produce an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. for example,
The effect of intervening the operation of the player is an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, etc.)
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 has a display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition for the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
An ordinary variable winning device 37 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow path 91. A starting winning opening 92 is provided at the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91.
Is provided. The guide portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches a game ball flowing downward without winning a prize at the start winning opening 92, and the left side where the special variable winning device 38 described later is present. It is designed to guide you toward you.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), and the starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) is used. The winning game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (which can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game.
The lower prize opening and the grand prize 1) 95 are arranged. The special variable winning device 95 is an opening / closing member 9
It has 5c, and the opening / closing member 9 depends on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game.
5c converts the closed state in which the large winning opening is closed (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state in which the opening / closing member 95c can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (advantageous state for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 95 is a large winning opening 1 solenoid 9 as a driving device.
It is equipped with a large winning opening (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 95c driven by 5b (see FIG. 3), and a small hit game state (second) according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game. During the special game state), the large winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It is designed to do. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (upper large winning opening, large winning prize) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth 2) 38 is arranged. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is in a closed state (disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, which is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2). , During the big hit game state (first special game state) as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game, or during the small hit game state (second special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Inside, by converting the state in which the large winning opening is closed to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. Inside the big prize opening (winning area)
Is provided with a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

When there are a plurality of large winning openings as in the present embodiment, the large winning opening switches 38a are provided with one or two large winning openings, or x as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variable winning device 95 forming the first special variable winning device (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) is provided with only one large winning opening switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variable winning device 38 forming the second special variable winning device (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) is a large winning opening switch 38.
A plurality (for example, two) a are arranged. Further, the special variable winning device 95 is, for example, a winning device (so-called mini-attacker) having a smaller large winning opening than the special variable winning device 38.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device 95, and the general winning opening 35 (right of the special variable winning device 38) are launched. You can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 in the department), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal variable prize device 37, special variable prize It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a normal map triggered by a prize.
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply (AC).
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (Random Access Memory) of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, starting port 2 switch 92a in the starting winning opening 92, gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a,
It is connected to the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0V-
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a 5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the winning opening switch 35a is 1.
Although it is shown by three blocks, in reality, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
It is input to / F121. Further, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (X) large winning opening switches 38a (3 in the present embodiment).
Pieces) are provided on the game board 30. And these multiple big winning opening switches 38a,
They are connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a switch and a game control device 10.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called a wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the conversion switch 112 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 (to the effective level). It can be read by changing). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a game performance (for example, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise is removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning. However, the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A first output port 134a for outputting open / close data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing and display data of the status display device 135 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a batch display device 5.
On / on of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed at 0
A third output port 134c for outputting off-data and a fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is connected are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and information about the game machine 10 can be transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. 3rd driver 138c, 5th output port 1 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side
Display data of the fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the 34e or the fourth output port 134d to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and the status display device 135 that is output from the first output port 134a. A fifth driver 138e is provided which receives a signal and generates and outputs a drive signal of the status display device 135.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls sound output to reproduce various melody, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a, 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands (effect commands) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
It executes processing such as management of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data and horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like, and these are reset. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

The settings in the gaming machine 10 may be set as follows to prevent fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 has a RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 when the setting is changed.
And the process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM in the payout control device 200 is executed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing gaming control over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 when the setting is changed and the setting is confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer, an information disclosure device such as a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device to which the security signal is input can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by the notification means (lamp, sound (including voice), etc.). The game control device 100 may output a security signal common to the setting change and the setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between the setting change and the setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back surface side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box except that a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed board box. Further, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is faced to the outside, and a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 is sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key because the operation of the setting key switch 127 is indispensable for access to the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to third party main media. The game control device 1
00 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operation (for example, opening / closing of an operation window) to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127, or may be set. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or a combination thereof may be used.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), and a required information display unit (status display device 135).
, The probability setting value display device 136) is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch that gives a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. You may do it.

(6) The game control device 100 includes a RAM initialization switch 112 and a setting key switch 127.
The four power-on states are determined from the combination of the input states of. The game control device 100 is a RAM.
When the initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be changed. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be confirmed. The setting is confirmed and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on.
When the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the RAM is set to the RAM clear (RWM clear) state for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200, and the RAM is initialized. When the switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is turned on to restore the power failure (recovery).

(7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps. The setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted in the OFF state (step 1). Operate (for example, turn) the setting key, and set key switch 1
Switch 27 to the ON state (step 2). Pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (
By turning on the power (power switch ON) while turning it on, the setting is changed (ON).
Step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). Operate (for example, turn) the setting key and switch the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state to confirm the setting value and end the setting change state (for example).
Step 5).

At this time, steps 3 and 4 are performed by the notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46).
Notifies the setting change with, and informs the RAM clear in step 5. In addition, external information output means (
For example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops outputting the security signal in step 5. The game control device 100 is set in step 5.
Prior to the RAM clear notification in step 3, RAM clear is executed in step 3. That is,
The game control device 100 gives priority to the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as a fraud prevention measure. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and turns off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 4, and the status display device 135 is turned off in step 5.
Display the base value with. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 is set to steps 1 and 2.
Turns off with, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. note that,
The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, the game starts in step 5, and the game is in progress thereafter.

(8) The gaming machine 10 can confirm the setting in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. The setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted in the OFF state (step 1). Operate (for example, turn) the setting key, and set key switch 1
Switch 27 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is set (step 3). The setting confirmation state is terminated by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops the output of the security signal in step 4.
Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and turns off in step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3, and the state display device 135 is turned off.
Display the base value in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4.
The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, the game starts in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

The gaming machine 10 is designed so that setting changes and setting confirmations can be performed only before the start of the game when the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game.
It facilitates operation guarantee during the game.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal start gate 3 is used.
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for hit determination of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Performs the process of determining the hit or miss. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, and then the normal symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning is based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37.
The start memory) is memorized, and based on this start memory, the random value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the first special figure variation display game Performs the process of determining the hit or miss. Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning opening 92, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination disturbance of the second special figure variation display game is performed. Extract the numerical value and ROM111
A process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed by comparing with the determination value stored in B.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 has a start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37,) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32.
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning opening 92).

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device by the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the 38 is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening 2. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A either wins a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls in the large winning opening 2, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening 2. One round is to open the large winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. Further, in the process of generating the small hit game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. The opening / closing member 95c of the special variable winning device 95 is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 1. Further, in the process of generating the small hit game state due to the result of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 2. The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec.
It is done 4 times at 0msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A may be used.
The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state.
Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example) of the first hit stop symbol
500msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1 /).
It is possible to have a higher probability (general figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) than 251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming control device 100 has a second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation) after the end of the time saving state (after the end of the electric support) generated by the predetermined big hit. Special figure 2 special mode that increases the probability that the result of the display game) will be a small hit, for example, by a specified period
It is possible to generate a specific result high probability state) that increases the probability that the second special figure variation display game will have a specific result. This special figure 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

Next, the outline of the game property (standard strategy) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The game nature of the gaming machine 10 is that in the normal gaming state (a state that is not any of the above-mentioned special figure 2 special mode, special gaming state, and time saving state), a left-handed hit is made and a big hit is made in the special figure 1 variable display game. Aim, right-handed in the special game state (big hit state) or time-saving state (during electric support), and right-handed in the special figure 2 special mode to aim for the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, special game state or time-saving state. And special figure 2 When the special mode ends and the normal game state is reached, the game returns to left-handed. In addition, by providing the above-mentioned special figure 2 special mode, there is a possibility that the player can play the game while maintaining a higher expectation than the normal game state even after the end of the time saving state, and the interest of the game is improved. do.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1, 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Equipped with D. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2. Various statuses are displayed depending on the lighting mode of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The gaming state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, FIG.
And as shown in FIG. 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the stack pointer that sets the stack pointer that is the start address of the area that saves the values of registers and the like when an interrupt occurs. Perform the setting process (step S2). Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and R is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register).
The upper address of the AM start address is set (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h.
Or take 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
Perform the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Also, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
It is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. 11
It is necessary to continue operating 2. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7).
After that, the standby time is timed and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S1).
0; N) is returned to the determination (step S9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
That is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends, RAM111C
Permission to read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as EEPROM or EEPROM is granted (step S13), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
In this first embodiment, the power failure inspection area check data 1 (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), and the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal. For example, it is determined whether or not it is 5Ah) (step S16).

Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y
), A checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum in a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S19).

Here, in the checksum calculation process performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the game control may be performed. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the work area for game and the data of the work area for status display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The game control work area is RW.
Of the storage areas in M, it is a work area used for game control. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, when the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier (step S19; Y).
In step S20), when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S20; N).
) Moves to step S25 (FIG. 7), and performs processing when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9; If it is determined to be N), the process proceeds to step S21, and initialization processing (first initialization processing) at the time of data abnormality is performed in steps S21 to S24. That is, the game control device 10
0 is the data stored in the RWM (data in all areas including the access prohibited area) based on the determination that the data in the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is abnormal.
It forms the first initialization means for initializing.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S21), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are cleared to zero (step S22). ), Set the RAM access prohibited area to access prohibited (step S23). Next, RAM in the area to be initialized
The initial value at the time of initialization is saved (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area in which a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the state display work area is used as the initial value, and in the present embodiment, the area is set to the initial value. This is the area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the production mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and initialization processing at the time of initialization operation in steps S27 and S28 (first). 2 Initialization process) is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data in the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (for example, RAM 111C). It serves as a second initialization means for initializing (data in an area that does not include an access prohibited area).

Then, when the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the RWM (for example, RAM 111) is used.
The data in the game control work area in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) in C) is cleared to zero (step S27), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step). S28), the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

As described above, the game control device 100 of the first embodiment performs initialization processing (initialization processing at the time of data abnormality).
Since it has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) to execute the initialization process (second initialization process) separately from the initialization process (first initialization process) and the initialization process at the time of the initialization operation (second initialization process), the situation may change. Optimal and lean initialization processing can be realized.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special figure status (special figure status area described later) is set. Directing commands for power failure recovery corresponding to the state indicated by the data Control board (
It is transmitted to the effect control device 300) (step S26), and the process proceeds to step S31.

Here, the area to be initialized in step S25 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is an indefinite state indicating that. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated commands are the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, both of which are normally being processed (during fluctuation, during big hit (first special game state), during small hit (first). 2 It is a command to command the display of the customer waiting demo screen in the case of a state) that is neither of the two special game states), and a command to command the display of the recovery screen in other cases.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29).
, Step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is specified. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted.
Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a CT that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of activating the C circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
The 11A includes a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. Also, a hard random number generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit (
Here, the bit transposition pattern of (big hit random number) is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). be. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The initial value (start) of various initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value random number, hit symbol initial value random number) is extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as a value) (step S33), interrupting is permitted (step S34).

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (small hit symbol random number) that determines the symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (hit symbol random number). It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, since the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers. By setting (start value), the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are the program's. CTC output with the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit (CTC (CT) of the timer interrupt processing
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on CTC (CTC2)) that is different from C0).
In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. Each of the above random numbers is "+1" or "-1".
It may be a counter-type update by ", or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear in pieces without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step S35.
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S).
38; N) returns to the determination (step S37) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited for to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means).
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. A means (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1).
21). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) (step S124). ). When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200.
Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125), a random number update process 1 (step S126), in which commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step S127) is performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error. Performs a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.). Further, a start port switch monitoring process (step S129) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, and a special figure 1 game process (step S130a) for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variation display game. The special figure 2 game process (step S130b) for processing the special figure 2 variable display game and the normal figure game process (step S130c) for processing the normal figure variable display game are performed.

In the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers are generated. (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result is determined in advance based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is determined in advance.

Next, a segment LED (for example, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is LE.
Segment LED editing process (step S13) that drives D) to display the desired content.
1) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. Performs processing Performs radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step S133). Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and a status display editing output process for status display (step S1).
35) is performed to end the timer interrupt processing.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a structural example of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, for example, the winning number counter area 1 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, respectively. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning number counter area 2 includes, for example, a 3-prize ball counter, a 10-prize ball counter, and a 14-prize ball counter, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In the check of the count number of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are checked in order from the top (from the three prize ball counters) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 or the like described later.

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 10, a counter in a plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not it is determined (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y),
The count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, the above-mentioned 3 pieces, 10 pieces, (Any of 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is "0".
If it is determined to be equal to or greater than (step S209; Y), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is set to "+1".
Update (step S210) and save the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number area (step S211).
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is output updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), the main board (game control device 1)
From 00), one pulse is output for every 10 scheduled payouts, and the payout board (payout control device 200) is output.
) Outputs one pulse for every 10 payouts.

Next, in the determination of step S203, all the checks are completed (step S203;
If it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N) in the determination of Y) or the determination of step S209, and the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the payout command transmission timer The value of is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213).
), When it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by reference to the port status but by reference to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio fraud occurrence". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (= when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count in (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S2).
18), the payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S).
If it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y), the check of the entire area is completed in step S217 (step S217). If it is determined as Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and subsequent steps depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. I have sent it since then. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first
The winning slot monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the two major winning slot switches 38a (count switch) in the upper winning slot (special variable winning device 38) (The data indicating the bit position and the like in the port of the signal is stored) is prepared (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) that wins the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open, and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 38a in the lower major winning opening (special variable winning opening device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and normal. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S274) for detecting the winning is executed.
Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275a), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275a) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning is detected. Step S275b) is executed.

Next, a winning slot switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a winning slot switch that can always win a prize (
Here, the winning opening monitoring table of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S276), and the winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (step S277). ), And further, the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the gaming machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is "0". To update within the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. Prepare the game machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab (step S280).
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284).
If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.
There is no monitoring target for the gaming machine status. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285).
.. Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S) for determining whether or not an error has occurred.
286) is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step S129).
The details of the above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3)
7) The winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 1 (step A103).
).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting port 1 (step A1).
In 03; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state (for example, a normal electric support state, a big hit, etc.) to be hit to the right (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the state is not a predetermined state to be hit right (step A10).
4; In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the normal electric support state, the starting port 1 is hardly won unless it is left-handed, and if the starting port 1 is won in the predetermined state where it should be right-handed, it is the predetermined state where it should be right-handed. However, since it can be presumed that the player has been hit to the left, a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) to instruct the player to strike right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (step A10).
7) Perform the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108).
Next, a winning monitoring table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109).
, The hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the starting port 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111;
In N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting port 2 (step A1).
In 11; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the normal power support state (time saving state) (step A112), and if it is determined that the game state is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), a big hit is being made. It is determined whether or not there is (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the southpaw support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final fluctuation of the normal power support, it should be left-handed, so the process of transmitting the left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric support state is in the normal electric support state (step A112; Y), and when it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is in progress (step A113; Y), the general electric support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 (step A117), the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is normal for the public electric machine to be illegal (even though the normal variable winning device 37 is closed). A step is provided to determine whether or not there is an illegality in which a prize is detected in the variable winning device 37), and if it is determined that this general electric power illegality is occurring, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 or later. It may be configured so that the second start memory (start memory of special figure 2) is not generated any more when there is an illegality of the electric power.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37)
And, of the starting port 2 (starting winning opening 92), the information of no winning of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A121), and the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a are set.
Of these, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122).
.. Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
, Determines if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, the special start port 1 switch process (step A).
The details of 108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A1).
33). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step A134), and step A1
It shifts to the process of 35. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133;
Y) passes step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 holdes (number of start storages of special figure 1) of the update target corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a of the monitoring target is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). Special figure 1 to be updated When the number of holdings is not less than the upper limit (step A135)
; N) ends the special figure start port 1 switch process. When the number of special figure 1 holdings to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set (). Step A136), the number of special figure 1 holdes to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. After that, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A145).
The effect command setting process (step A146) is performed to end the special figure start port 1 switch process.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores up to a predetermined number as the starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) first starts various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, the special start port 2 switch process (step A).
The details of 118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the start port 2 switch 92a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), update the loaded value by "+1" (step A152)
), It is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
It passes 154 and proceeds to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 2 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0".
It is configured to determine that the number of outputs will overflow.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
If the number of special figure 2 holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch processing is terminated. When the number of special figure 2 holdings to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set (step A155; Y). In step A156), the number of special figures 2 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is stored in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. After that, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A165).
The effect command setting process (step A166) is performed to end the special figure start port 2 switch process.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning winning storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process and special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N).
), It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is not hit (step A173; N).
In), a jackpot determination process (step A174) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A17).
5). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is displayed. It is set (step A176), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A177), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A180).
In (N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A183), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. (Step A182), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any one of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and the effect command setting process (step). A18
5). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, the look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is completed.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation, which will be described later. It is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2. Therefore, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. It is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory can be obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, the display device 41.
It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (step S130a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variation display game) (step A1). .. When it is not in the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 2 (step A1)
In N), a large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (step A1; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. Special figure 1 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Special figure 1 Refer to the above. Set the game sequence branch table in the register (step A5).
, The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. Fig. 1 Setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Normal processing (step A8)
To do.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step A9).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or the big hit of each big hit. Setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and fanfare /
Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (setting information required to perform processing during the interval)
Perform step A10).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing residual ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but it is the final round. For example, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, the processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc., and the processing for the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step A13). Do it.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Perform the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) to set the information necessary for performing.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition processing, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S130b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step A)
In 31; N), a large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (step A31; Y).
And, when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33
If the game processing timer of Special Figure 2 is not "0", it is updated to "-1" (step A3).
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and the special figure 2 in RWM. Special figure 2 which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer The timer value for length variation (for example, 6) is stored in the game processing timer area.
(0000 msec) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35;
In Y), a special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in a register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game processing number is used using the table. Acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to (step A39).
.. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4).
7).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. Fig. 2 Setting information necessary for processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Normal processing (step A4)
8).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2 are performed. 2 Perform the variable processing (step A49).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of the big hit, or
Perform special figure 2 display processing (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A52), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but it is the final round. For example, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, the processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing, etc., and the processing for the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step A53). Do it.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end process (step A54) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Small hit fanfare processing that sets the information necessary for performing (
Step A55) is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition processing, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A56).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, when the time is not up or when the processing of step A37 is completed, step A59 is performed. Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this judgment, the game state is
In the case of the state of the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state), that is, the special figure 2. When FIG. 2 is correct, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 is determined to be able to start the fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (that is, the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300).
After that, it is determined (whether or not the right-handed instruction notification command is not transmitted) (step A2).
52). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, and if the left-handed instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step A252; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), the effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

When the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the number of holdings in FIG. 1 (first start storage number) is "0". It is determined whether or not (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A256; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A257), and an effect command is prepared. The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, and the special figure 1 is performed.
A decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the hold number is prepared (step A260), an effect command setting process (step A261) is performed, and a special figure 1 is set in the special figure status area in the RWM.
Information indicating that the game is changing (special figure 1 while the variable display game is being executed) is set (information addition) (step A262), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variable display game is high (step A26).
3).

In the special figure status area, the information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) are displayed. Each is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

Further, in the special figure 1 variation start process (step A259), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 1 variable process, in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A31 described later).
8, A319), the process of saving the changing flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), and the process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later). ) Etc. are performed.

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264;
In N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is performed by the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A264;).
In Y), the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N) and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the processing numbers are set. “0” is set (step A267), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268), and the special drawing 1 game processing number is stored. 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A251 is in a positive state.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0", the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed). , Special figure 1 The variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as variable based on the second start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this judgment, the game state is
In the case of the state of the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state), that is, the special figure 1. When FIG. 1 hits, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the above period, the special figure 2 determines that the fluctuation can be started.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (step A271; Y), the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the hold number (second start storage number) is "0" (step A272). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A27).
3), the effect command setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area in the RWM (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed). Set (add information) the information indicating (step A276),
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the states indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) are "special figure 2 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing" when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 2 changing process, in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A34 described later).
8, A349), special figure 2 process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), special figure 2 process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later). ) Etc. are performed.

For example, after executing step A275, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2). Also, in the usual processing, the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278;
In N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that it is in high probability (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that it is in high probability final fluctuation (step A278;
In Y), the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is When it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283).
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A283; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and the effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. In addition, the command prepared when the effect command setting process is performed (
Here, the customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A281).
In the case of (N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step A282; Y), and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the processing number (step A283; Y). Step A287), the processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 normal processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A271 is in a positive state.
If the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed). , Special figure 2 The variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variable display based on the first start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 change start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure change display game is started. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 303), the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304) for setting the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is performed, and the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding pattern setting is set, is prepared (step A305). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A308).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311). Special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A).
312) When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not, for example, “4” or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set in the fluctuation start information setting process of step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value (for example, 60,000 ms) sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 below).

Further, the variation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the variation display game of the special figure 2) can be calculated from the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 2 (value in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2). Specifically, step A
In 313, the timer value for length variation saved in step A37 described above (for example, 60000).
The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time to the result of multiplying m seconds) by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer.

Further, when the timer value for long fluctuation is, for example, 60,000 msec (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining fluctuation time in special figure 2 is 240. It is more than a second (= 4 × 60 seconds), which is longer than the longest fluctuation time in Special Figure 1.
In that case, since it is not necessary to execute steps A315 and A316, which will be described later, step A312 is provided to determine the steps A315 and A316. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value "4" in the above figure is only an example of a numerical value for preliminarily determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 2 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. not.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and special figure 1 to be started from now on. Fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306)
However, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 currently being changed (calculation result of step A313 or special figure 2)
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than the time determined by the value of the game processing timer in FIG. 2 (step A314).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A3).
14; N) prepares a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step A315), and performs an effect command setting process (step A316).

Next, when it is in high probability (step A308; Y), when it is in high probability final fluctuation (step A308; Y).
In step A309; Y), when special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312;
Y), when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y).
), And when step A316 is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 22).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" in the game processing number area.
(Step A319), and clear the customer waiting demo flag area, which is the area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A321).
Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 53 of the special figure 1) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 1 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 in step A324 is to start the change display of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is started. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 333), the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting the special figure 2 information, which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, is performed, and the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding pattern setting is set, is prepared (step A335). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A338).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining change time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started from now on (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of the special figure 1 which is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A3).
44; N) prepares a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer (step A345), and performs an effect command setting process (step A346).

Next, when it is in high probability (step A338; Y), when it is in high probability final fluctuation (step A338; Y).
In step A339; Y), if special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), special figure 2
When the fluctuation time of is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and
When step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 24).

When the process shifts to step A347, the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is stored in the special figure 2 in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" in the game processing number area.
(Step A349), and clear the customer waiting demo flag area, which is the area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM (step A350). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A351).
Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 2 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change (step A354), and the special figure 2 change start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 in step A354 is to start the change display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment (No. 1).
Is. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment (
Part 2).

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2,
And the information of the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A).
In 491; Y), the information (for the holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 1 is cleared (step A491a). ). When the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information in the random number storage area of the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the special figure game processing timer area for the added value (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1). While the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step). A49
9) If it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the “region of storing the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer in the RWM) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to “. Save "0" (step A500).

On the other hand, when the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

In addition, in order to fluctuate the time that is not enough for the 2-byte special figure game processing timer, special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the game processing timer in FIG. 2) is set for the length variation of. Further, when, for example, 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496, and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) saves. The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is subtracted by 1 in the step A36, and further, in the step A37, 60,000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. It is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variation time of FIG. 2 is 60,000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, which is a variation time of 10 minutes. Actually, 4
Since it is a timer interrupt of ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication by 60 seconds is explained as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the variation command data (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the variation command data (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A503). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a larger byte configuration may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A).
505) When the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by "-1" (step A506), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is changed. The random number storage area of the address is set and shifted (step A507), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of reserved special figures 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the above-mentioned effect command setting process, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. The detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands containing information about patterns (sometimes referred to as variable pattern commands), and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the high probability fluctuation number update process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process (
The details of steps A317 and A347) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 shows the first
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in high probability (step A551), and when it is not in the special figure high probability (step A551; N).
) Ends the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process.

When one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is in the big hit gaming state, the hit probability of the other variable display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one of them is small. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high-probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high-probability fluctuation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "0" (step A553).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A553; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y),
The signal relating to the high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. Signal to
A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559).
), Set the high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) at which the fluctuation starts (step A560), and end the high-probability fluctuation number update process.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag includes information that can determine the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure change display game that is the high-probability final change. In addition, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation, so even if it is currently in the low probability, the information to show that the fluctuation started in the high probability is this high. Probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the probability state (setting state in the game control device 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the start of the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening during the final round of the special figure change in the high probability state, the hit determination for this start prize is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during change in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during change in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A5).
71), load the command (decorative special figure 1 command including the stop symbol information about special figure 1) from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepare (step A572), and perform the effect command setting process (step A573). ..

Next, a decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), an effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final is performed depending on the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (step A576). Then, when the final fluctuation is not high probability (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 1 variation display game. When the stop display time of (step A577) is set and the final fluctuation has a high probability (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the final fluctuation with a high probability is set as the special figure 1 of this time.
It is set as the stop display time of the variable display game (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 136 ms is set as the display time.
Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), in the case of off (step A579; Y), step A
If it shifts to 594 and it is not out of the way (step A579; N), the special figure 2 is currently changing (step A579; N).
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step A580).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is changing shall be made by any of the information in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, it may be determined that the game is changing if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, or it is determined that the game is changing if the special figure 2 changing state is set in the special figure status area. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

When the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A).
582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 2 is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (time set in step A577 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A58).
3) Save the display time of the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5).
84). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, if the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and the effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, a decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), and an effect command setting process (step A) is prepared.
588) is performed, and special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 2 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A5).
80; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area, saves it in the hit symbol command area (step A590), and determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A591). ..

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information is provided from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (special figure 1) in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation.
Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information) that determines the round number upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592), load the information from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area, and win the big prize. Save in the open mouth information area (step A593).

Next, when the current special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (step A579; Y), when the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), and step A5.
When 93 is completed, the process proceeds to step A594. When moving to step A594,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A595) is performed. Special figure 1 Ends the process during change. In addition, in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special FIG. 2 variable processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special FIG. 2 variable processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A6).
01) Load a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepare it (step A602), and perform the effect command setting process (step A603). ..

Next, a decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), an effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final is performed depending on the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (step A606). Then, when the final fluctuation is not high probability (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 2 variation display game. When the stop display time of (step A607) is set and the final fluctuation has a high probability (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the final fluctuation with a high probability is set as the special figure 2 of this time.
It is set as the stop display time of the variable display game (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. Even if there is, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit symbol pattern. Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the out-of-stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variation display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), in the case of off (step A609; Y), step A
If it shifts to 624 and it is not out of the way (step A609; N), the special figure 1 is currently changing (step A609; N).
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step A610).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is changing shall be made by any of the information in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, it may be determined that the game is changing if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, or it is determined that the game is changing if the special figure 1 changing state is set in the special figure status area. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

When the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of symbol confirmation outputs is updated by "+1" (step A).
612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 1 is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of special figure 2 this time (time set in step A607 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A61).
3) Save the display time of the special figure 1 in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6).
14). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, if the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 1 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and the effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, a decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), and an effect command setting process (step A) is prepared.
618) is performed, and special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 1 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A6).
10; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area, saves it in the hit symbol command area (step A620), and determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A621). ..

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (special figure 2) is obtained from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation.
Special figure 2 that determines the upper limit of the number of rounds (2 rounds upper limit information) is loaded, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A622), information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area, and a big prize is won. Save in the open mouth information area (step A623).

Next, when the current special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (step A609; Y), when the current special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), and step A6.
When 23 is completed, the process proceeds to step A624. When moving to step A624,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed. Special figure 2 The processing during fluctuation is terminated. In addition, in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process.
The details of 595) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A632).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53,
The stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A634), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process.
The details of 625) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A641), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54,
The stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A644), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process.
The details of 619) will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A654), and the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is stopped in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). ) (Step A655). It should be noted that, in this stop symbol pattern area, for the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, usually, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-order stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to 661 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate it due to an outlier.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (RW) is cleared.
Clear (step A657) (step A657) of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information in M.
The deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit or whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of these information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process.
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A660), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process.
The details of 589) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A674), and the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is stopped in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). ) (Step A675). It should be noted that, in this stop symbol pattern area, usually, for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-order stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to 681 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate it due to an outlier.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (RW) is cleared.
Clear (step A677) (step A677) to clear the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information in M.
The deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of these information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the process during display of the special figure 1 (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37, and 38. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the process of displaying the special figure 1, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, when it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A707), the effect command setting process (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "
4 ”and others, for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71) is performed.
Perform 3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A).
714), the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (for example, 5000m)
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) is set (step A717).
, The set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A718), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot that opens the upper jackpot (special variable winning device 38) (step A719).

If it is a big hit with the opening of the upper prize opening (step A719; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal prizes in the upper prize opening is cleared (step A720), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is set in the upper prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step A719; N), the information in the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A722), and the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is fraudulently monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When shifting to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A726) and end the processing during display of special figure 1.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A705).
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728).

Then, in step A728, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A).
In 728; Y), a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A729). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A730). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A732). In step A732, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is an embodiment in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in a high probability state, step A
In step A732, the deleted configuration (or left-handed instruction notification in a high probability state is given)
Then, there may be a configuration in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A).
In 728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
733), the effect command setting process (step A734) is performed. Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) to be left-handed (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the state should be left-handed (step A73).
7; In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the display LED during right-handed striking, the game status display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740).
). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

When the process shifts to step A742, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit with the upper prize opening open (step A742; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal prizes in the upper prize opening is cleared (step A743).
, Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step A7)
44), the process proceeds to step A747.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit to open the upper prize opening (step A742; N), the information in the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A745), and the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegal. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

When the process shifts to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process ends. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4) in the special figure 1 game processing timer area.
Performs processing such as saving m seconds).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748).
Then, in step A748, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A).
In 748; Y), a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A749). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A750). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not a hit (step A753; N).
In order to save the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A754) and turn off the right-handed display LED, the left in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the hitting state is saved (step A755). In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit), the right is aimed at the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. Since it is in a state to be hit, if the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), steps A754 and A
It passes 755 and proceeds to step A756. Further, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM
Clear (information subtraction) the information indicating that the game is changing (special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (step A756), and in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the special figure 1 processing number related to normal processing, that is, "0".
Is saved (step A757), and the process of displaying special figure 1 is terminated. In addition, step A75
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 2 is changing, or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the process during display of the special figure 2 (step A50) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 39, 40, and 41. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information in the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, when it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A765) and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step A765; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A767), the effect command setting process (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "
4 ”and others, for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and the effect command setting process (step A77) is performed.
Perform 3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A).
774), the effect command setting process (step A775) is performed.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (for example, 5000m)
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A777)
, The set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot that opens the upper jackpot (special variable winning device 38) (step A779).

If it is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step A779; Y), the information of the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A780), and the fraudulent monitoring period outside flag is set in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step A779; N), the information in the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A782), and the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is fraudulently monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When shifting to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). A786) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A765).
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788).

Then, in step A788, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A).
In 788; Y), a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A789). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A790). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A792). In step A792, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is an embodiment in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in a high probability state, step A
In step A792, the 792 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in a high probability state).
Then, there may be a configuration in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A).
In 788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
793), the effect command setting process (step A794) is performed. Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) to be left-handed (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the state should be left-handed (step A79).
7; In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the display LED during right-handed striking, the game status display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A797; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A800).
). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

When the process shifts to step A802, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit with the upper prize opening open (step A802; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal prizes in the upper prize opening is cleared (step A803).
, Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step A8)
04), the process proceeds to step A807.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit to open the upper prize opening (step A802; N), the information in the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A805), and the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is illegal. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

When the process shifts to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process ends. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area.
Performs processing such as saving m seconds).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808).
Then, in step A808, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A).
In 808; Y), a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A809). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A810). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
Step A813). It should be noted that step A812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N).
), The signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A814), and the display LED during right-handedness is turned off in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, it is in a state where a right-handed hit should be made aiming at the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A813; Y), the game passes through steps A814 and A815 and proceeds to step A816. Further, in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in a small hit, a left-handed state should be made aiming at the lower large winning opening (special variable winning device 95) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), step A81 after executing steps A814 and A815.
Move to 6. However, the processing content related to such right-handed and left-handed hits varies depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and the game characteristics, and is only an example. Also here, step A815
Is also completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM
Clear (information subtraction) the information indicating that the game is changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A816), and in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the special figure 2 processing number related to normal processing, that is, "0".
Is saved (step A817), and the process of displaying special figure 2 is terminated. In addition, step A81
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 1 is changing, or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and the main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is set to "0".
If not, "-1" is updated (step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, the value of the security signal control timer is "0".
(Step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, the value of the security signal control timer is "0".
(Step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, step C79
Processing is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the above-mentioned main process and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer, until the security signal control timer times out. The on-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, the magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), and the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81;
Y), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), big prize opening fraud is occurring (step C83)
When Y) or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved. Save in the test signal output data area (step C86). Similarly, even when an illegal operation is occurring, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It may be configured.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general power fraud, big prize opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch error 1 or It is determined whether or not the switch error of switch error 2 is occurring (step C87).
When no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

Then, when any of the switch abnormalities is occurring (step C87; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, the abnormal variation and the switch abnormality in FIG. 2 are abnormalities monitored by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

Next, after completing steps C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the start port 1 (
The start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of the starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening of the special figure 1 and the normal variable winning device 37) is performed, and the starting opening 2 (special) is performed. The start port 2 signal editing process (step C90) for editing the winning signal (starting port 2 signal) of the starting winning opening 92), which is the starting winning opening in FIG. 2, is performed. Subsequently, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol confirmation count signal is obtained based on the symbol confirmation count output count (symbol confirmation count signal output count). The symbol determination number signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit is V
Allows the display circuit in the DP 312 (not shown) to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of LED and display device 41 such as brightness and volume, and setting the changeable range.
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that all commands for the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process have been prepared.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit follows the command set in step D23 to VDP3.
Instruct 12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D30, and thereafter, step D1.
The process of steps 8 to D30 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
Reference numeral 30 is a loop process (30) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (directing command) is MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO.
It is configured to include N data (1 byte), and effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. In the following, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

The process of receiving commands from the main board is "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown).
It is done by. That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is abnormal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term "storing" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM322 or RAM311a).
Is set to. Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means RAM (effect control device 300 of this example).
Means fetching data from RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, step D41.
Immediately after the execution of, "A = B". Immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB ="
"0" is a normal movement, but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main board) 100 is given the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, the value of A may increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, step D43
Then, a subtraction process called "AB" is performed. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit inputs the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the command read index value, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, is updated by, for example, "1" in the range of "0" to "31". Do it. In addition, "0" to "31" here
The range of corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (eg, "32").

[Step D46] Whether or not the control unit has completed copying the commands for the number of received commands (
That is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 are repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions) is determined. The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
Separately and memorize each. In the case of a variable system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the data of the upper byte stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern and AC.
The low-order byte data stored as T commands the latter half fluctuation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit sets step D53 when the value of MODE is in the normal range.
If the value of MODE is not in the normal range, the received command analysis process is terminated. note that,
The value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT is a predetermined ACTION check table (
It is defined in (not shown), and in step D53, it is checked whether the separated ACT value is within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be the normal range (at this point, the tooth described later). I haven't been able to check for omissions).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined by using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command that commands an operation related to the jackpot production (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that the data of this jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. In addition, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / invalid commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead fluctuation system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for pre-reading effect. When any of the processes of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a start winning memory in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding).
In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the variable display game corresponding to (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will be) will be a big hit when the game is subsequently executed, the player will be notified in advance of the start winning memory, etc. It is a production that is performed in a mode different from the usual one. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the orientations of the components mounted on the substrate are aligned in a specific direction. First, the substrate arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 47 shows how the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main body frame) 11. The gaming machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and the front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. for that reason,
The gaming machine 10 has excellent maintenance workability in an installation environment on the open side of the outer frame 11 rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12. In particular, in recent gaming machines, since the amount of protrusion of the front side component of the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) is large, the front frame 12 is used for the game hall equipment (for example, the calling lamp). Or, it may interfere with the card unit or the like, and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited. The outer frame 11 allows the front frame 12 to be opened and closed with the left side as the rotation axis, but may be openable with the right side as the rotation axis.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back surface side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 housed in a board box facing the connector connection portion. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 housed in a board box facing the connector connection portion. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, 514 facing the back surface side from the front frame 12. Various substrates 512, 513, 514 are
A control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, a relay board 70), another board (for example, an LED board or a sensor board), and the like. Further, the front frame 12 makes the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened, so that the game control board 510 and the effect control board 511 can be visually recognized.
, Supports various substrates 512,513,514.

The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control board 510, an effect control board 511, and various boards 512,5.
13,514 are electrically connected by a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the boards or a power line for transmitting power between the boards.

The front frame 12 is provided with various substrates and a harness connected to the substrate (not shown) facing the back surface side. The front frame 12 may have a substrate or a harness facing the back side via a protective cover (not shown).

Next, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the second embodiment and a mounting base that supports the game control device with a front frame. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of an AA cross section of the game control device of the second embodiment.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 521, and the game control device 10 is provided via the mounting base 521.
Support 0. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the lower opposite side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the board box 520, includes engaged portions 522a and 522b corresponding to the engaging portion 522, and locked portion 523a corresponding to the locking portion 523. To prepare for.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, mounts the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis, and then mounts the locking portion 523. By locking to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520
When the substrate box 520 is removed from the mounting base 521, the board box 520 needs to be operated to release the locked state between the locked portion 523 and the locked portion 523a. Therefore, the locking portion 523 is the gaming machine 10.
It has a side surface as an operation unit for releasing the locked state of the board box 520 for the operator who performs the maintenance work.

The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as a main structure, and the game control board 510 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The upper member 5201 supports the game control board 510 by the board support portion 5203 (for example, a boss), and fixes the game control board 510 by the screw 5204. Further, the lower member 5202 supports the game control board 510 by the board support portion 5205 (for example, a rib). As a result, the game control board 510 is supported with a predetermined gap from the outer surfaces of both the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202.

The upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 are crimped by a caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw or the like). The caulking unit 524 makes it possible to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. For example, the caulking portion 524 has a required number of screws before caulking, and by crimping one of them, it is in a caulked state, and by destroying a pre-prepared part of the substrate box 520, a trace (for example, for example). It is possible to release the caulked state by retaining the cutting marks of the resin, etc.). Further, the substrate box 520 is provided with a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached to the sealing portion 525 so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected depending on the state of the sealing seal 525a. For example, the sealing seal 525a is a substrate box 520.
It was broken by opening the substrate box 520, and the fact that the substrate box 520 was opened is shown by the broken state. The sealing seal 525a may include an RF (Radio Frequency) tag or the like, and whether or not the substrate box 520 has been opened by short-range wireless communication (for example, by detecting the destruction of the antenna due to a communication failure). It may be something that can be detected.

The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a component mounting surface on the front surface and a solder surface on the back surface. The game control board 510 includes a required number of connectors 530 and components 540 on the component mounting surface. Part 540
Is inside the board box 520 and is not exposed to the outside so that it cannot be replaced with an illegal part. On the other hand, the connector 530 faces the outside of the board box 520 from the window portion 5209 which is an opening provided in the board box 520 (upper member 5201), and can be connected to a predetermined harness by the connector. In the game control board 510, most of the connectors 530 are arranged on the upper side to prevent the harness from obstructing the observation of the component mounting surface. Further, the game control board 510 has a connector arranged on the lower side, but such a connector is limited to a connector (for example, an inspection connector or the like) to which a harness is not connected in an operating environment. As a result, the gaming machine 10 achieves both efficiency in component placement and suppression of obstacles in observing the component mounting surface.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 50 (1) is provided with the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction. The resistance 541 is a resistance arranged in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. The resistance 542 is a resistance arranged in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

The resistors 541 and 542 are passive elements whose ratings are indicated by a color code and have a required number of color bands. For example, resistors 541 and 542 have four color bands, the first color band 54.
The first number indicated by 3, the second number indicated by the second color band 544, and the multiplier indicated by the third color band 545,
The nominal resistance tolerance indicated by the fourth color band 546 is displayed. Therefore, resistors 541,542
By facilitating the confirmation of the first color band 543, the ease of confirmation as the resistors 541 and 542 can be enhanced. The resistors 541 and 542 have the first color band 54 on the side where the color band spacing is narrow.
3 is displayed, and the fourth color band 546 is displayed on the side where the color band spacing is wide.

As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. The front frame 12 has an open side (open end side) on the left side and a shaft support side (rotating shaft side) on the right side with respect to the main body frame 11. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the shaft support side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 has the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 on the front frame 1.
The resistor 542 is mounted toward the lower side of 2. In other words, the game control board 510 has a resistor 5.
A resistor 542 is mounted so that the fourth color band 546 of 42 faces the upper side of the front frame 12.

Further, the game control board 510 includes a connector 530a used for game control and a connector 530b (inspection connector) used for predetermined inspection and not used for game control. In the connector 530a, the harness is a game control board 510 for connecting a predetermined connector to the harness.
If it touches the component mounting surface, it may hinder the visibility of the mounted component. That is, even if the harness may be applied to the component mounting surface of the game control board 510, the game control board 510 has a resistance 542 with better visibility of the first color band 543 as compared with the fourth color band 546. Improves ease of confirmation. Since the connector 530b is not connected to the connector during commercial operation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall, it does not hinder the observation of the component mounting surface.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator (facilitating the inspection work). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Next, regarding the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510, FIG. 51 from another viewpoint.
Will be described using. FIG. 51 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 51 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as a component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520 and is supported by the front frame 12 with the engaging portion 522 of the board box 520 on the upper side and the locking portion 523 on the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 51 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the resistor 542 has the first color band 543 in the substrate box 52.
The fourth color band 546 is directed toward the engaging portion 522 of the board box 520 toward the locking portion 523 of 0.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 is based on the locking portion 523, which is an operation unit when the board box 520 is removed from the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened for maintenance and inspection work.
The operator can confirm the resistance 542. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 from another viewpoint. FIG. 52 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 52 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and one connector 530b on the component mounting surface. The connector 530a is a connector used for game control, and the connector 530b is, for example, an inspection connector, which is used for a predetermined inspection and is not used for game control. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the required harness is usually connected to the connector 530a with a connector, but the harness is not usually connected to the connector 530b during commercial operation in the gaming field. Further, the connector 530b can be easily distinguished from the connector 530a from the viewpoint of whether or not the harness is connected to the connector. The connector 530b may be distinguished by having a different color from the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is red and the connector 530a is non-red, in addition to the presence or absence of the harness connection. Further, the connector 530b may be distinguished from the connector 530a by a shape different from that of the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is a modular type and the connector 530a is a non-modular type, in addition to the presence or absence of a harness connection.

Further, the game control board 510 is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required direction, and the processor 532 is provided on the component mounting surface. For example, the processor 532 is a gaming microcomputer 111. The processor 532 can be distinguished from other integrated circuits (for example, a driver IC) by attaching a sticker or the like indicating a model name. The processor 532 can also be distinguished by the maximum number of pins among the components mounted on the game control board 510. Further, the processor 532 may be distinguished by being given a predetermined color so that the processor 532 is blue and the other integrated circuits are non-blue (for example, black or the like).

As a result, the game control board 510 has a connector 530b as a specific connector to be mounted.
The processor 532 can be specified as a specific integrated circuit to be mounted.

In the game control board 510, the connector 530b and the processor 532 are arranged with an offset d1 in the left-right direction and an offset d2 in the vertical direction. The offset d1 has a positive direction in which the connector 530b is located and a negative direction in which the connector 530b is not located with respect to the processor 532. Further, the offset d2 has the direction in which the connector 530b is located as the positive direction with respect to the processor 532, and the connector 5
The direction in which 30b is not located is defined as the negative direction.

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the positive direction side of the offset d1 and the fourth color band 546 toward the negative direction side of the offset d1.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistance 541, opens the front frame 12, and improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 toward the positive direction side of the offset d2 and the fourth color band 546 toward the negative direction side of the offset d2.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistance 542, opens the front frame 12, and improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

The positive direction of the offset d1 is the same as that of the front frame open side, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as that of the front frame shaft support side. Further, the positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as the lower side of the front frame, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the upper side of the front frame. Similarly, offset d2
The positive direction of is the same as that of the board box locking portion side, and the negative direction of the offset d2 is the same as that of the board box engaging portion side.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the resistance 5 while clarifying the reference direction of the resistances 541 and 542.
It is also possible to improve the visibility of the 41 and the resistance 542.
Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 from another viewpoint. FIG. 53 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53 (1) is provided with the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with the required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in the required orientation. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and is sealed by a sealing seal 5251 at a sealing portion 525.

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, sealing seal 5251
Displays the characters "Opening prohibited". The sealing seal 5251 may display management information by displaying an image such as an alphanumerical character, a symbol, or a two-dimensional code. Further, the sealing seal 5251 may be used to clarify the source or display a design for preventing forgery. The sealing seal 5251 is a sealing seal 525 depending on the required characters and design.
Specify the normal position of 1. For example, the sealing seal 5251 has a normal position (reference to the sealing portion) when the right side of the drawing is viewed downward.

As shown in FIG. 53 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), the resistor 542 holds the first color band 543 on the left side of the sealing portion reference (
The fourth color band 546 is directed to the right side of the sealing portion reference (upper side in the figure) toward the lower side in the figure.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the operator to confirm the resistance 542 with reference to the sealing portion 525 when the front frame 12 is opened and maintenance and inspection work is performed. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510. Since the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 525 and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related, it is easy for the operator to understand that the sealing portion 525 is used as a reference.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 from another viewpoint. FIG. 54 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 54 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as a component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and is sealed by a sealing seal 5251 at a sealing portion 525. Further, the control number sticker 5206 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The control number sticker 5206 displays necessary information while using the base as a transparent material to facilitate confirmation of the component mounting surface. For example, the control number sticker 5206 displays the main board control number as required information. For example, the control number sticker 5206 displays the required information in black or white with a solid background of the characters as needed. The control number sticker 5206 clearly indicates the correct position of the control number sticker 5206 by displaying required information. For example, the control number sticker 5206 has a normal position (control number sticker reference) when the lower side of the figure is viewed downward.

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, sealing seal 5251
Displays the characters "Opening prohibited". The sealing seal 5251 clearly indicates the correct position of the sealing seal 5251 by a required character or design. For example, the sealing seal 5251 has a normal position (sealed seal reference) in the direction in which the right side of the figure is viewed downward.

The orientation of the control number seal standard and the orientation of the sealing seal standard are orthogonal to each other. The direction of the control number seal reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 541, and the orientation of the sealing seal reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 542.

As shown in FIG. 54 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the control number seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the control number seal reference.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the operator confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistance 541 by having the operator confirm the control number sticker 5206, and the ease of confirmation of the resistance 541 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing to the left side of the sealing seal reference.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 causes the operator to confirm the sealing seal 5251 and thereby resists 54.
The position of the first color band 543 of 2 can be grasped, and the ease of confirmation of the resistance 542 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Since the type of the game control device by the control number sticker 5206, the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 5251, and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related, the control number seal 5206 and the sealing seal 5251 are used. The standard is easy for the worker to understand.

Next, the display of the part numbers on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 55.
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the display of the resistance mounted on the game control board of the second embodiment and the corresponding part number.

Part number 547 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is displayed in the vicinity of the resistor 541 in the same direction as the resistor 541. The part number 547 displays, for example, the character "R15". At this time, the first letter "R" of the part number 547 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 541, and the last letter "5" of the part number 547 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 541.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by using the first character of the part number 547 as a clue. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a first color band 543 of the resistance 541.
Is used as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of part number 547.

Part number 548 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is displayed in the vicinity of the resistor 542 in the same direction as the resistor 542. The part number 548 displays, for example, the character "R16". At this time, the first letter "R" of the part number 548 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 542, and the last letter "6" of the part number 548 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 542.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by using the first character of the part number 548 as a clue. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a first color band 543 of the resistance 542.
Is used as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of part number 548.

Up to this point, resistors 541 and 542 have been described as the components 540 included in the game control board 510, but the components provided on the component mounting surface in the required orientation are not limited to this. A component provided on the component mounting surface in a required orientation will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a component provided on the component mounting surface of the second embodiment.

For example, the game control board 510 may include a chip (surface mount) type resistor 549, as shown in FIG. 56 (1). The resistor 549 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The resistor 549 has three letters and displays the first digit, the second digit, and the multiplier in order from the left. For example, the resistor 549 has three letters "1".
, "0" and "2" indicate 1 kΩ. Therefore, the resistance 549 can improve the ease of confirmation of the resistance 549 by facilitating the confirmation of the first character.

The part number 550 is displayed in the vicinity of the resistor 549 in the same direction as the character string displayed by the resistor 549. The part number 550 displays, for example, the character "R16". At this time, part number 5
The first letter "R" of 50 is on the "1" side indicating the first digit of the resistor 549, and the last letter "6" of the part number 550 is on the "2" side indicating the multiplier of the resistor 549.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first digit of the resistor 549 by using the first character of the part number 550 as a clue. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first digit of the resistor 549 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 550.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (2), the game control board 510 may include a capacitor 551. The capacitor 551 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. The capacitor 551 has three color bands, and displays a first number indicated by the first color band 552, a second number indicated by the second color band 553, and a multiplier indicated by the third color band 554. Therefore, the capacitor 551 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 551 by facilitating the confirmation of the first color band 552. The capacitor 551 displays the first color band 552 on the side where the color band spacing is narrow, and displays the third color band 554 on the side where the color band spacing is wide.

Part number 555 is the capacitor 551 in the direction in which the color bands displayed by the capacitor 551 are lined up.
It is displayed in the vicinity of. The part number 555 displays, for example, the character "C10". At this time, the first character "C" of the part number 555 is on the first color band 552 side of the capacitor 551, and the last character "0" of the part number 555 is on the third color band 554 side of the capacitor 551.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 555 as a clue, and the capacitor 5
Facilitates the discovery of the first digit of 51. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 551 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 555.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the game control board 510 may include a capacitor 556. The capacitor 556 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The capacitor 556 has three letters and is the first from the left.
Display numbers, second numbers, and multipliers. For example, the capacitor 556 has three letters "1",
"0" and "3" indicate 10,000 pF. Therefore, the capacitor 556 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 556 by facilitating the confirmation of the first character.

Part number 557 is the direction in which the character strings displayed by the capacitor 556 are lined up.
It is displayed in the vicinity of. The part number 557 displays, for example, the character "C11". At this time, the first character "C" of the part number 557 is on the "1" side indicating the first digit of the capacitor 556, and the last character "1" of the part number 557 is on the "3" side indicating the multiplier of the capacitor 556. ..

As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 557 as a clue, and the capacitor 5
Facilitates the discovery of the first digit of 56. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 556 as a clue to facilitate the discovery of the first character of the part number 557.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the orientations of the parts mounted on the substrate are aligned with the specific directions related to the two-dimensional codes provided by the control number seal and the sealing seal, respectively. The mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the first modification of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as a component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in a board box 520 and is sealed by a sealing seal 5252 at a sealing portion 525. Further, the control number sticker 5207 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The control number sticker 5207 displays required information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface using the base as a transparent material. For example, the control number sticker 5207 displays the control code 5208 as required information. For example, the management code 5208 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark), etc.). The control code 5208 clearly indicates the normal position of the control code 5208 by a display mode in which the alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the control code 5208 has a normal position (control code reference) in which the lower side of the figure is viewed downward.

The sealing seal 5252 displays the sealing code 5253 as required information. for example,
The sealing code 5253 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark), etc.). The sealing code 5253 clearly indicates the normal position of the sealing code 5253 by a display mode in which the alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, sealing code 52
In 53, the direction in which the right side of the drawing is viewed downward is the normal position (sealing code reference).

The orientation of the control code reference and the orientation of the sealing code reference are orthogonal to each other. The direction of the control code reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 541, and the orientation of the sealing code reference indicates the arrangement direction of the resistor 542.

As shown in FIG. 57 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the control code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the control code reference.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 gives the operator a management code 5208 (control number sticker 5207).
By confirming, the position of the first color band 543 of the resistance 541 can be grasped, and the resistance 5 can be grasped.
The ease of confirmation of 41 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing cord reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing to the left side of the sealing code reference.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the operator grasp the position of the first color band 543 of the resistance 542 by having the operator confirm the sealing code 5253 (sealing seal 5252), and the resistance 542 can be grasped.
Improve the ease of confirmation. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Since the type of the game control device is grasped by the management code 5208, the soundness is confirmed by the sealing code 5253 (or the validity of the sealing seal 5252 is confirmed), and the confirmation of the game control board 510 is closely related. It is easy for the operator to understand that the control code 5208 or the sealing code 5253 is used as a reference.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment is different from the board box 520 of the second embodiment in that the positions of the engaging portion and the locking portion are reversed.

First, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the second modification of the second embodiment and the mounting base in which the game control device is supported by the front frame.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 550, and the game control device 10 is provided via the mounting base 550.
Support 0. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 551. The substrate box 551 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has a locking portion 552 on the long side on the upper side and an engaging portion 553 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 550 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the board box 551, includes engaged portions 553a and 552b corresponding to the engaging portion 553, and locked portion 552a corresponding to the locking portion 552. To prepare for.

In the board box 551, the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 552b are first engaged with each other, and then the engaging portion 553 is placed on the mounting base 550 with the engaging portion 553 as a rotation axis, and the locking portion 552 is placed on the mounting base 550. By locking to the locked portion 552a, it is fixed to the mounting base 550. The board box 551
When the board box 551 is mounted on the mounting base 550, the board box 551 requires an operation of first engaging the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 552b. Therefore, the engaging portion 553 has an aspect as a work starting point of the mounting work of the board box 551 for the operator who performs the maintenance work of the gaming machine 10.

The connector 530a faces the outside of the board box 551 from an opening window provided in the board box 551 (upper member), and can be connected to a predetermined harness by a connector. By arranging the connector 530a on the upper side of the game control board 510, it is possible to prevent the harness from becoming an obstacle to observing the component mounting surface. Further, in the game control board 510, the harness impedes the visibility of the locking portion 552 by arranging the connector 530a on the upper side. Such a game control device 100 hinders the operability of a third party who tries to perform an illegal operation.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 59 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 551 and is supported by the front frame 12 with the locking portion 552 of the board box 551 on the upper side and the engaging portion 553 on the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 59 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the operator who performs maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the resistor 542 has the first color band 543 in the substrate box 55.
The fourth color band 546 is directed toward the locking portion 552 of the substrate box 551 toward the engaging portion 553 side of 1.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 resists the operator with reference to the engaging portion 553, which is the work starting point when the board box 551 is attached to the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened to perform maintenance and inspection work. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the modification 3 of the second embodiment has a reset SW as compared with the gaming control board 510 of the second embodiment.
Is different in that it is provided on the substrate. The mounting of the resistor (resistance) on the game control board of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the orientation of the game control board of the third modification of the second embodiment and the resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 555 shown in FIG. 60 (1) is provided with a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and is provided with a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. Further, the game control board 555 is provided with a reset SW556 at one corner of the rectangular board. For example, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW556 in the lower left corner of the board.
The lower left corner of the board is on the open end side of the front frame 12 and is at a position where the reset SW556 is excellent in operability, and the harness connected to the connector 530a is the reset SW55.
It is a position that does not interfere with the operability of 6.

The resistance 541 is a resistance arranged in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. Resistance 542
Is a resistance arranged in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 60 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located in the first color band 543 of the resistor 541. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 in the direction in which the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 is not reset SW556.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be used by workers who open the front frame 12 to perform maintenance and inspection work.
The reset SW556 is provided as a suitable marker to improve the ease of checking the resistor 541. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 555.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is located in the first color band 543 of the resistor 542. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 by directing the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 in the direction in which the reset SW556 is not present.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be used by workers who open the front frame 12 to perform maintenance and inspection work.
The reset SW556 is provided as a suitable marker to improve the ease of checking the resistor 542. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 555.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 555.

In addition, the modification 3 of the second embodiment was described by exemplifying the reset SW556 as a reference component for grasping the orientation of the resistors 541 and 542, but if it is provided in one corner of a rectangular substrate, it is described. , Other parts may be used as reference parts.

Further, the modification 3 of the second embodiment has been described by exemplifying the lower left corner portion of the substrate as one corner portion of the rectangular substrate, but one corner portion of the rectangular substrate is referred to as the upper left portion, the upper right portion, the lower right portion, and the like. It may be.

Although the game control board 510 has been described as an example of the second embodiment, the effect control board 511, various other control boards (for example, the payout control board), the relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and the like. It can also be applied to other boards (for example, LED boards and sensor boards).

Regarding the second embodiment, the game control board 510 may be illustrated, and the resistors 549 and the capacitors 551 and 556 may be mounted instead of the resistors 541 and 542. The same can be applied to the modified example of. In addition, the second embodiment (
The gaming machine 10 (including the modified example) has a resistor 549 and a capacitor 55 in addition to the resistors 541 and 542.
1,556 may be mounted, or different kinds of parts may be mixed and mounted. Even if different parts are mixed, the gaming machine 10 can improve the ease of checking the parts according to the above-mentioned arrangement rule.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main body frame (outer frame 11), a front frame (front frame 12) that can be opened and closed with one of the left and right sides of the main body frame as a rotation axis, and a front surface with visible component mounting surfaces. Substrate supported by the frame (
For example, a game control board 510) and the like. When a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is displayed by a color code is mounted on the substrate in the left-right direction, the first color band of the color code is on the open end side of the front frame (see FIG. 50).

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 551) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The housing case has an engaging portion that engages with the front frame (for example, the engaged portions 553a and 553b provided in the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on one side (for example, the lower side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. (For example, the engaging portion 553) and the engagement portion engaged with the front frame (for example, the locked portion 552a provided in the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as the rotation axis. Includes a stop (eg, locking portion 552). The substrate is a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction).
When mounting the above, the first color band of the color code is set to the engaging portion side (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The housing case has a front frame (for example, an engaged portion 52 included in the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction.
2a, 522b) is provided with an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 522) and a front frame (for example, a mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as a rotation axis. A locking portion (for example, a locking portion 523) that is locked to the locked portion 523a) is included. When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (the direction in the vertical direction) of the substrate, the first color band of the color code is set to the locking portion side (see FIG. 51).

(4) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The accommodating case accommodates a substrate with a plurality of connectors (for example, connectors 530a) on the substrate facing one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate has the first color band of the color code on the other side (lower side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. ) (See FIG. 50).

(5) In the substrate of (1), when the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the front frame (front frame 12). ) (See FIG. 50).

(6) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes a storage case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board by making the component mounting surface visible. The accommodating case accommodates the substrate by facing a plurality of connectors (for example, connectors 530a) on the substrate on the upper side of the front frame (see FIG. 48).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular substrate (for example, a gaming control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a substrate box 520) for accommodating the substrate by making the component mounting surface visible. The housing case includes a base portion (for example, lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a covering portion (for example, upper member 5201) that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages with the base portion, and a base portion and a cover. Includes a sealing portion (eg, sealing portion 525) that seals the engagement relationship with the body portion. The board is
A passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is indicated by a color code is oriented parallel to one side of the sealing portion side (for example, the right side of the game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53) (for example, the top and bottom of the front frame 12). When mounting in the direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the left side of the sealing portion reference) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular substrate (for example, a gaming control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a substrate box 520) for accommodating the substrate by making the component mounting surface visible. The storage case is a first case portion (for example, upper member 5201) that covers the component mounting surface of the substrate.
And a sealing portion (for example, sealing) that seals the engagement relationship between the second case portion (for example, the lower member 5202) that engages with the first case portion and the first case portion and the second case portion. Part 525) and. The substrate has a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) whose rating is indicated by a color code oriented in parallel with one side of the sealing portion side (for example, the right side of the game control substrate 510 shown in FIG. 53) (for example, a front frame). When mounting in the vertical orientation of 12), the first color band of the color code is on the left side (for example, the left side of the sealing portion reference) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).
..

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular substrate (for example, a gaming control board 510) and a storage case (for example, a substrate box 520) for accommodating the substrate by making the component mounting surface visible. The housing case has one orientation (for example, a lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a cover that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages with the substrate (for example, the upper member 5201). For example, a control number slip (for example, the orientation of the front frame 12 in the left-right direction) attached along the line.
A sealing slip (for example, a seal) to which the engagement relationship between the control number seal 5206) and the base portion and the covering portion is attached in an direction orthogonal to one direction (for example, the vertical direction of the front frame 12). Includes a sealing portion (eg, sealing portion 525) that is sealed by a stop seal 5251). When mounting a passive element (for example, resistor 541) whose rating is displayed by a color code on the board in one direction, the first color band of the color code is on the left side (for example, the control number) when the control number slip is viewed in the normal position. When the passive element (for example, resistor 542) is mounted in the direction orthogonal to one direction with the seal reference left side, the first color band of the color code is on the left side (for example, sealing) when the sealing slip is viewed in the normal position. Set to the left side of the seal reference) (see FIG. 54).

(10) The control number slip and the seal slip of (9) indicate the correct position by the character strings to be displayed (for example, the main board control number, the character "opening prohibited", etc.) (see FIG. 54).
(11) The control number slip and the sealing slip of (9) each indicate a correct position by an image display (for example, a two-dimensional code, a design, etc.) (see FIG. 57).

(12) The image display in (11) is a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 57).
(13) The gaming machine 10 has a rectangular substrate (game control board 510) including a processor (for example, a processor 532) and an inspection terminal (for example, a connector 530b) that is used for inspection but not for game control. Be prepared. On the board, the processor and the inspection terminal are mounted with offsets (offsets d1 and d2) in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectively, and passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) whose ratings are displayed by color codes are mounted in the vertical and horizontal directions. When mounting a plurality of passive elements in the vertical direction (for example, a resistor 542) and a passive element mounted in the horizontal direction (for example, a resistor 542).
For example, for each of the resistors 541), the direction in which the inspection terminal is located with respect to the processor is the direction in which the first color band of the color code is located (see FIG. 52).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the orientations of the components mounted between the integrated circuit and the connector on the substrate are aligned in a specific direction in the positional relationship between the integrated circuit and the connector. First, the substrate arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement relationship of integrated circuits, connectors, and resistors on the game control board of the third embodiment and the orientation of the resistors mounted on the game control board. The same configurations as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described by the same reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the gaming machine 10 mounts an integrated circuit 560 and connectors 561,562,563 on the substrate mounting surface of the gaming control board 510. The integrated circuit 560 is a rectangular IC package having one side in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front, and is, for example, a driver IC for an input signal.
(More specifically, the integrated circuit 560 is an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121). The integrated circuit 560 is an example of an integrated circuit mounted on the game control board 510, and may be an output signal driver IC, a required control circuit, a buffer circuit, a port expander, or the like.

The connectors 561, 562, 563 are connectors for inputting / outputting signals input / output from the integrated circuit 560 to the outside. The connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 face each other with a component placement area 566 interposed therebetween.

In the component placement area 566, a linear resistor 541 (line-shaped component: for example, part numbers R22 and R21) is arranged on the integrated circuit 560 side of the line TL, and the connector 561 and the connector 561 are arranged from the line TL.
Linear resistance 542 on the 562,563 side (Linear parts: for example, part numbers R15, R3,
Place R2). The resistor 541 is arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (horizontal direction in the figure), and the resistor 542 is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (vertical direction in the figure). In other words, the resistor 542 is the integrated circuit 560 and the connector 561,
The resistor 541 is arranged in the direction connecting the 562 and 563 (up and down direction in the figure), and the resistor 541 is an integrated circuit 56.
It is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the direction connecting 0 and the connectors 561, 562, 563 (left-right direction in the figure).

The game control board 510 is a multilayer board (for example, a two-layer board), and the connector 56.
When connecting 1,562,563 and the integrated circuit 560 via the resistor 542, the first layer (
For example, the wiring pattern is passed through the component mounting surface), and when the connector 561,562,563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected via the resistor 541, the wiring pattern is passed through the second layer (for example, the solder surface).

As a result, the game control board 510 facilitates wiring of the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 541 and the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 542. Further, the game control board 510 divides the component placement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, which facilitates component confirmation. also,
Since the game control board 510 divides the part arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, it is easy to secure the part number display area.

In the game control board 510, resistors 541 and 542 are exemplified as examples of mounting components, but in place of the resistors 541 and 542, or in addition to the resistors 541 and 542, other components having a mounting direction are placed in the component placement area 566. It may be implemented in.

Further, the game control board 510 may limit the orientation of components in the component placement area between all integrated circuits and all connectors, or may limit only a part of the orientation of the components. .. For example, the connectors 561 and 562 have a starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a).
, The connector to be connected to the start port 2 switch 37a), and its existence is clearly indicated by the fluorescent color. The game control board 510 may set a component placement area between the connectors 561 and 562, which require attention as such fraud monitoring targets, and the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side. Therefore, the game control board 510 has the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 on the left side (front frame 12).
The resistor 541 is mounted toward the open side of the. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing to the right side (the shaft support side of the front frame 12).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 downward. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing downward (lower side of the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 has a resistor 542.
The resistor 542 is mounted with the fourth color band 546 facing upward (upper side of the front frame 12).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistances 541 and 542 of the operator performing the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

Next, a setting example of the line TL will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a setting example of the line TL of the third embodiment.
The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (1) is set to pass through the lower end of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side (integrated circuit 560 side) of the resistor 542 is inserted. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL. In addition, line T
L is not limited to the lower end of the through hole 564, and may be set between the upper end and the lower end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (2) is set to pass through the lower end (integrated circuit 560 side) of the main body (excluding the lead wire) of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 is the line TL.
Part number 548 is displayed on the resistor 542 side. The line TL may be set between the lower end of the main body of the resistor 542 and the upper end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (3) is below the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 (integrated circuit 5).
60 side), and is set at a position overlapping the main body of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (4) is set at a position separated from the lower end (BL) of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side (integrated circuit 560 side) of the resistor 542 is inserted by a distance d. .. At this time, the game control board 510 has a part number 54 on the resistance 542 side of the line TL.
8 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (5), the game control board 510 has a resistance 54 rather than the line TL.
Part number 548 may be displayed on the 2nd side so as to be in contact with the line TL. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the game control board 510 straddles the line TL and has a part number 5.
48 may be displayed.

Further, the line TL is a virtual line that can be recognized by parts mounted on the game control board 510, through holes, patterns, silk printing (part number display, etc.), but silk printing (silk printing (part number display, etc.)) on the game control board 510. It may be a solid line specified by a solid line, a broken line, etc.), or it may be a solid line specified by printing, a sticker, or the like on the substrate box 520.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the third embodiment, the component placement area and the non-component placement area are arranged between the integrated circuit and the connector on the substrate. The component placement area and the non-component placement area will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a component placement area and a non-component placement area located between the integrated circuit and the connector on the game control board of the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of an AA cross section of the game control device of the modified example of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 is a game control device 10 that houses the game control board 510 in the board box 520.
0 is provided, and an integrated circuit 560 and connectors 561, 56 are provided on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510.
Implement 2,563.

The game control board 510 sets the component placement area 566 and the non-component placement area 565 side by side between the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563. The component placement area 566 is located on the integrated circuit 560 side, and the non-component placement area 565 is the connector 561,562,56.
Located on the 3rd side. The part placement area 566 arranges the resistor 542, and the non-part placement area 565 displays the part number 548 corresponding to the resistance 542.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542, and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 are electrically connected via a pattern 572 provided on the solder surface of the substrate 570. That is, the game control board 5
Reference numeral 10 has no pattern for electrically connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 on the component mounting surface of the substrate 570.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 are housed in the substrate box 520 and protected from the outside. On the other hand, the connector 561 faces the outside from the opening 567 provided in the board box 520, and makes it possible to connect the required harness to the connector.

The board box 520 has a predetermined gap on various parts for accommodating various parts (for example, integrated circuit 560, resistor 542, etc.). On the other hand, the board box 520 has an opening of 567.
In the vicinity, it is close to the game control board 510. Therefore, the substrate box 520 has an upright wall 568 between the area for accommodating various parts (part arrangement area 566) and the opening 567. The upright wall 568 is within the non-part placement area 565.

Since the non-component placement area 565 includes the upright wall 568, the game control board 510 is the upright wall 5.
The visibility of the part number display may be insufficient in the vicinity of 68. Therefore, the game control board 5
Reference numeral 10 is a component (eg, integrated circuit 560, resistor 542) within the range of the component placement area 566.
, Etc.) are displayed in the range of area 5651, the part numbers corresponding to various connectors (for example, connector 561 etc.) are displayed in the range of area 5653, and the part number display in the range of area 5652 is restricted. ..

Here, the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment.

In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (1), the part number 573 corresponding to the resistor 542 is displayed in the range of the non-part placement area 565 in the same direction as the resistor 542, and the area 565 is displayed.
Connector number 574 (part number) corresponding to connector 561 in the range of 3 is connector 561.
It is displayed in the same direction as (the direction orthogonal to the resistance 542), and the part number display in the range of the area 5652 is hidden. As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the parts and part numbers of the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

The part number display shown in FIG. 65 (2) displays the part number 575 in the area 5651 and displays the part number 576 straddling the area 5651 and the area 5652 in the non-part number arrangement area 565. However, the part number 576 displays a number portion (number "15") having a large discriminating power in relation to an adjacent part number in the area 5651, and a character portion (character) having a small discriminating power in relation to the adjacent part number. "R") is displayed in the area 5652, whereby the game machine 10 is displayed.
Can ensure a certain discriminating power of part number 576 while sacrificing part of the visibility of part number 576. Further, the gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of freedom in the display position of other part numbers (for example, part number 575) by sacrificing a part of the visibility of the part number 576. As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the parts and part numbers of the operator who performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts against the gaming control board 510.

FIG. 66 (1) shows a part of the AA cross section of the game control device shown in FIG. 64 (non-part placement area 5).
65) It is an enlarged view. The substrate box 520 can be deformed by receiving an external force from the outside. At that time, the upright wall corner portion 580 of the board box 520 may come into contact with the game control board 510.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the game control board 510 arranges the pattern 582 on the solder surface avoiding the component mounting surface in the region 581 directly below the corner portion of the standing wall where the corner portion 580 can come into contact. As a result, the game control board 510 is prevented from malfunctioning due to a failure of the game control board 510 due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520.

Further, in the game control board 510, when the pattern 583 cannot be arranged on the solder surface while avoiding the component mounting surface in the region directly under the upright wall corner portion 581, that is, when the pattern 583 is arranged on the component mounting surface, the upright wall angle Part number 58 on pattern 583 in area 581 directly below the part
4 is displayed. Since the part number 584 has a certain thickness by silk printing or the like, the pattern 583 can be protected.

As a result, the game control board 510 is prevented from malfunctioning due to a failure of the game control board 510 due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520.
Although the game control board 510 has been described as an example of the third embodiment, the effect control board 511, various other control boards (for example, the payout control board), the relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and the like. It can also be applied to other boards (for example, LED boards and sensor boards).

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a control board (for example, a game machine) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and a connector (for example, connectors 561,562,563) to which signals input / output by the integrated circuit can be connected. A control board 510) is provided. The control board is located in the connector side region located on the connector side among a plurality of passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) mounted in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, in the component placement region 566). The orientation of the passive element to be mounted is the first orientation connecting the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, the orientation connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561,562,563), and the passive element is mounted in the integrated circuit side region located on the integrated circuit side. Second orientation (eg, integrated circuit 56) orthogonal to the first orientation of the passive element
The direction orthogonal to the direction connecting 0 and the connectors 561,562,563).

(2) The connector-side region of (1) is a region between the integrated circuit and the connector that is located on the connector side of the predetermined line, and the integrated circuit-side region is located on the integrated circuit side of the predetermined line. Area to do.

(3) The predetermined line of (2) is a line specified on the control board (for example, an actual line by silk printing or the like).
(4) The predetermined line of (2) is an unspecified line (for example, a virtual line recognizable from a mounting component or the like) on the control board.

(5) The gaming machine 10 is a control board (for example, a game machine) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and a connector (for example, connectors 561,562,563) to which signals input / output by the integrated circuit can be connected. A control board 510) is provided. The control board is a region on the integrated circuit side located on the integrated circuit side (for example, a component placement region 56) in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector.
A passive element (for example, a resistor 542) is mounted on 6), and passive element information (for example, part number 548) related to the passive element is displayed in a connector side region (for example, non-part placement area 565) located on the connector side.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, with respect to the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10, FIG. 67.
, FIG. 68 will be described. Here, the base is the ball ejection rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal gaming state is a state that is neither a time-saving state nor a big hit gaming state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in a special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State). The payout rate is the number of payout balls per 100 out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls in the normal game state is set to Nout, and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Ns.
When afe is used, the base B is calculated by the formula B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls launched into the game area and entered the out port or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal), and is the number of out balls or simply. Sometimes called out. Further, the number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payout balls, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As described above in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 has a state display device 13
5 is provided. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a state display device 135 which is a display means of the base and a storage area for the base, and FIG. 67 (1) shows a display unit of the state display device 135 and is shown in FIG. 67.
(2) shows the storage area for the base. Further, FIG. 68 shows an example of display by the state display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the status display device 135 is composed of four 4-digit 7-segment LEDs provided side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part) is provided. 4-digit 7-segment LED for base display
Of these, the two digits on the left are the identification seg that displays the measurement time of the base (whether or not it is being measured and the order in which it was measured), and the two digits on the right are the ratio seg that displays the value of the base. ing. As shown in FIG. 68, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays "B" in the form of lowercase letters "b".

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A which is a control unit) has a RAM 111C.
A storage area for a base as shown in FIG. 67 (2) is set in the RWM such as, and is used for calculating the base and displaying the base. That is, the game control device 100 sets, as a base calculation storage area, an “out ball number” that stores the cumulative value of the out ball number and a “payout ball number” that stores the cumulative value of the payout ball number. Further, as a base storage area for storing the calculated value of the base, "base (BL)", "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)" are set.

Here, the "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, and the "base (B1)".
) ”Is an area for storing the base measured one time ago,“ base (B2) ”is an area for storing the base measured two times before, and“ base (B3) ”is an area for storing the base measured three times before. It is an area to store the base. That is, it is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base among the storage areas in which the "base (B3)" is set.

The above-mentioned storage area for base calculation and the storage value of the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except for the RWM abnormality. It is desirable to have a configuration that retains memory without clearing zero at the time.

The game control device 100 uses the status display device 135 to display the setting contents of the probability setting (setting of any of the five stages) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above by the status display device 135. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted so that the status display device 135 also functions as the probability setting value display device. In that case, the status display device 13 may be used.
The setting contents are displayed in each of the above modes according to 5, and the base is displayed by the status display device 135 in other modes.

The game control device 100 performs calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first confirms all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5).
Flashes all (for seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 has a BL display state as shown in FIG. 68 (1), FIG. 68 (2).
), The B2 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (3), and the B3 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (4) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). do. That is, in the steady state after the power is turned on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then B3.
The display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and so on, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays "bL" (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (this time) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base" in the ratio segment. (BL) ”value (or“ --- ”) is displayed. Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b1" (B1) indicating that the measurement time of the base is one time before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B1)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 has a measurement time of 2 based on the identification segment.
"B2" (B2) indicating that it is the previous time is displayed, and the value (or "----") of the base storage area "base (B2)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, the game control device 1 is displayed in the B3 display state.
00 displays "b3" (B3) indicating that the measurement time of the base is three times before in the identification segment, and the value (or "----") of the base storage area "base (B3)" in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, for the purpose of calculating the base, the game control device 100 is set to "every time an out ball is detected (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output) in the normal game state after activation" in the base calculation storage area. The stored value of "the number of out balls" is increased by the value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and every time there is a prize in the winning opening of the game ball in the normal game state (or the prize ball is paid out based on the winning). Equivalent to the number of payout balls (or the number of actually paid out balls detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200) that generated the stored value of the "number of payout balls" in the base calculation storage area. Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-mentioned formula every time the storage value of the "out ball number" or the "payout ball number" in the base calculation storage area changes, and the calculation result is used as the base B. Overwrite the "base (BL)" of the base storage area as the latest value.

In the game control device 100, when the stored value of the "out ball number" in the base calculation storage area reaches the specified number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces), it is assumed that one measurement is completed, and the following measurement is performed. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the processing at the end of this measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is used as the base storage area "base (B3)".
And the value of the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is used as the base storage area "
Overwrites "base (B2)", overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" at that time with the base storage area "base (B1)", and further overwrites the value of the base calculation storage area "out sphere". Clear the stored values of "number" and "number of payout balls" and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to 3 times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and retained.

Then, when the game control device 100 is turned on for the first time (base calculation storage area "out number of balls""
In the period A in which the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is less than the predetermined calculation start number (for example, the predetermined number of less than 300), in each display state, the identification segment is displayed. Characters indicating the measurement time of the base such as "bL", "b1", etc. are blinked and displayed, and in the ratio segment, "----" (a state in which only the central horizontally long segment emits light) is displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (4). It is displayed to notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 stores the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

Then, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 is in the BL display state. Blinks or lights up "bL", and the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In period B, other display states (
In the B1 to B3 display state), a character indicating the measurement time of the base such as "b1" ... is displayed in blinking in the identification seg, and "----" is displayed in the ratio seg to notify that the measurement is not performed.

The display of "bL" in the identification segment in the BL display state is the storage area for base calculation "
When the stored value of "out ball number" is less than the measured number, a blinking display is displayed, and when the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number, a lighting display is displayed. Further, the blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, 0.6 seconds, of which 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing. Further, when the stored value of the "out number of balls" reaches the number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces) and the period B ends, the above-mentioned processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100 refers to the period B for performing the first measurement, the period C for performing the second measurement, the period D for performing the third measurement D, the period E for performing the fourth measurement, and so on. The measurement is performed continuously as follows. Since the calculated values of the bases of the past three times are stored after the time when the third measurement is completed, the base measurement time such as "b1" in the identification segment is set in all the B1 to B3 display states. The indicated characters are lit and displayed, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (any of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)") is displayed in the ratio segment.

Note that FIGS. 68 (1) to (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the above period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, there is no measurement result 3 times before, so
In FIG. 68 (4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “----” (display indicating the unmeasured state).

Further, in FIG. 68 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “58”.
It shows that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58.
Further, in FIG. 68 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “67”, and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured one time before is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 68 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is ".
49 ”, and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured two times before is 49.
It shows that. If the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment is displayed as "99." (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that the ratio segment is 100 or more. Notify that.

The base value is generally in the normal range of, for example, about 25 to 35, and is abnormal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range, and this abnormality is called a base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 68 described above shows as an example a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in the normal case, the numerical value in the normal range of about 25 to 35 is shown in the identification segment. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 is, for example, a base measurement value (above B) stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”) three times in the past.
When all of the displayed values of the ratio segment in the 1 to B3 display state are out of the normal range and are abnormal,
Assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, a signal indicating that the base abnormality has occurred is transmitted to an external, for example, a game hall internal management device (hall computer).

The signal (information) indicating the base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the display area of the display device 41 is notified of the base abnormality by the control of the effect control device 300 that receives this signal. An image (for example, an error notification image) may be displayed. In addition, since this base abnormality may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set it to the above-mentioned strong error.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to the past 3 times, but the number of the storage area for the base is increased to be stored and displayed up to the past 4 times or more. It may be configured to be used. In addition, although the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values. good.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The game control device of the fourth embodiment includes a game control board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection. Although the game control board will be described as an example of a board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection, it can also be applied to other boards such as an effect control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, and a lamp board. Is. First, the game control device of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the fourth embodiment.

Like the game control device 100, the game control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521 (see FIG. 48). The game control device 100a includes a board box 520 similar to the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and the game control device 10 of the second embodiment.
A game control board 600 different from 0 is housed in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the lower opposite side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the board box 520, includes engaged portions 522a and 522b corresponding to the engaging portion 522, and locked portion 523a corresponding to the locking portion 523. To prepare for.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, mounts the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis, and then mounts the locking portion 523. By locking to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as a main structure, and the game control board 600 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

The caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw or the like) crimps the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking unit 524 makes it possible to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. Further, the substrate box 520 is provided with a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached to the sealing portion 525 so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected depending on the state of the sealing seal 525a.

Further, the substrate box 520 has an information display sticker 603 attached to the upper member 5201.
The information display sticker 603 displays necessary information such as a model name, a manufacturer name, a board management number, and a board box opening history. The information display sticker 603 may make it difficult to observe the game control board 600 directly underneath when viewed from the front, but the game control is performed by printing and displaying information on a transparent base material and changing the observation angle. A blind spot does not occur in the observation of the substrate 600.
The visibility of the information display sticker 603 is ensured by not unnecessarily increasing the area of the information display sticker 603. Further, ensuring the visibility of the information display sticker 603 also depends on securing a gap between the information display sticker 603 and the game control board 600.

The game control board 600 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 600 is a two-layer board in which a conductor pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 600 is provided with screw holes 602 at each of the four corners, and is screwed to the lower member 5202 through the screw holes 602.

Further, the game control board 600 includes an information display area on at least one of a component mounting surface and a soldering surface. For example, the game control board 600 has an information display area 60 on the component mounting surface.
1 is provided. The information display area 601 is an area for displaying necessary information regarding the game control board 600 such as a model name, a manufacturer name, and a board management number.

The information display area 601 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display sticker 603 in front view. According to another viewpoint, the information display sticker 603 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display area 601 in the front view. That is, the game control device 100a arranges the information display area 601 and the information display sticker 603 at positions that do not overlap in the front view. As a result, the gaming machine 10 secures the visibility of the information display area 601 in a state where the gaming control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12. Since the information display area 601 displays information useful for confirming the game control board 600, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the confirmation of the information display area 601 so that the game control board 6 can be easily confirmed.
It facilitates confirmation of 00 or the game control device 100a.

Next, the front surface and the back surface of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 shows
It is a figure which shows an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of 4th Embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 600 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 600 has connectors 530a, 530b and resistors 541, which are shown in FIGS. 50 and 52.
542, processor 532, etc. are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 70 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 600, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 600 has an information display area 601 (indicated by diagonal hatching), screw holes 602a, and G on the surface thereof.
It has an ND pattern 604 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 601 displays control board information regarding the game control board 600. The information display area 601 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 604, based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 601 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 600. As a result, the game control board 600 suppresses that the GND pattern 604 loops around the outer periphery of the information display area 601 and the arrangement of the information display area 601 becomes a noise source. The game control board 600 does not need to be provided with the information display area 601 in contact with one side of the game control board 600 as long as the noise due to the arrangement of the information display area 601 can be overlooked. That is,
The game control board 600 may be surrounded by the GND pattern 604 to arrange the information display area 601. Further, the information display area 601 may have a shape not limited to a rectangle, and may have rounded corners, for example.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 601 facing down. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 604. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided with two sides of the lower left corner thereof in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600. As a result, in the game control board 600, the GND pattern 604 loops on the outer periphery of the solid-removed portion around the screw hole 602a, and the arrangement of the solid-removed portion around the screw hole 602a is suppressed from becoming a noise source. If the game control board 600 is in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600 and is solid around the screw hole 602a, if the noise due to the arrangement of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a can be overlooked. It is not necessary to provide a punching part. That is, the game control board 600 may be surrounded by the GND pattern 604 and may have a solid removing portion around the screw hole 602a. In addition, the solid part around the screw hole 602a is
The shape is not limited to a rectangle, and for example, the corners may be rounded.

The GND pattern 604 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 601. As a result, G
The ND pattern 604 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 601 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 601 in the game control board 600. Further, the GND pattern 604 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 601 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 604 in between, the screw hole 602a is also the information display area 601 in the game control board 600.
It has the role of clarifying the whereabouts of. The shape and size of the shown GND pattern 604 is an example and is not limited to this. The GND pattern 604 is an information display area 6
It suffices as long as it is located on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the 01 and the screw hole 602a, and may be more complicated or may have a size that spreads over the entire substrate.

FIG. 70 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 600, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
00 has an information display back surface area 601a (indicated by a broken line), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604a (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display back surface area 601a is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower right corner when observing the back surface of the game control board 600 with the information display back surface area 601a (information display area 601) facing down. The GND pattern 604a includes an information display back surface area 601a. That is, the information display back surface region 601a is also a GND pattern (GND solid).

Next, the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the information display area of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 71 (1) describes an information display position in the information display area 601. The information display area 601 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 600 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 600 as a short side. The information display area 601 has a short side having a width d1 and a width d2 on the end side of the game control board 600.
Divide the inner side by the width d3. In the information display area 601, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 606a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 606b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 606a has an information display pattern 605 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 605 displays necessary information about the game control board 600 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 605 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 600.

The information non-display portion 606b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and is an information display region 6
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 605 and the GND pattern 604 from coming close to each other on the long side side of 01. As a result, the game control board 600 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 605. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the gaming control board 600.

Further, in the game control board 600, the information display pattern 605 becomes a noise source and reduces the influence on the GND pattern 604. From this point of view, the game control board 600 has a width d2.
It is desirable to set the information display unit 606a and the information non-display unit 606b by making the width d3 larger than that.

Next, FIG. 71 (2) shows the details of the information display pattern 605. Information display pattern 60
Reference numeral 5 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 605a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is "Kou Co., Ltd.". The conductor pattern 605a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604. Further, the conductor pattern 605a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604a. As a result, the conductor pattern 605a becomes
Although it has the property of being a noise source, its influence is limited by the information non-display unit 606b.

Next, FIG. 71 (3) shows a modified example of the information display pattern 605. Information display pattern 6
07 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 607a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is "Kou Co., Ltd.". The conductor pattern 607a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 607a has a via 607b and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. This limits the properties of the conductor pattern 607a that can be a noise source. The conductor pattern 607a is preferably provided with one or more vias 607b in all of the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part thereof.

Next, a first modification (modification 1) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the first modification of the fourth embodiment. first,
FIG. 72 (1) describes the information display area 611 included in the game control board 610. The game control board 610 is different from the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment in that it has an information display area 611 instead of the information display area 601, and is the same in other respects.

The information display area 611 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 610 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 610 as a short side. The information display area 611 has a width d4.
The short side of the game control board 610 is divided into three parts by a width d5 on the inner side, a width d7 on the end side, and a width d6 between them. The information display area 611 is the information display unit 61 in order from the inner side of the divided areas.
5a, information display unit 615b, information display unit 615c. The width d5, the width d6, and the width d7
May be the same as or different from.

The information display unit 615a has an information display pattern 612 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 612 displays necessary information about the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 612 displays the logo of the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615a displays information by removing the conductor pattern based on the conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed by the information display unit 615a has an aspect of the punched pattern forming information formed by the punched pattern.

The information non-display unit 615b has an information display pattern 613 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 613 displays necessary information about the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 613 displays the name of the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615b displays information by arranging a conductor pattern on a punching base that does not have a conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed by the information display unit 615b has an aspect of conductor pattern formation information formed by the conductor pattern.

The information non-display unit 615c has an information display pattern 614 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 614 displays necessary information about the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 614 displays the board management number of the game control board 610.

In the game control board 610, the back surfaces of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be solid portions of the conductor pattern, or may be solid portions of the conductor pattern. Further, in the game control board 610, the back surfaces of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be a combination of the solid portion and the solid portion of the conductor pattern. For example, the game control board 610 is on the back surface of the information display unit 615a (information display unit 615a).
The area corresponding to) can be a solid part, and the back surface of the information display part 615b (the area corresponding to the information display part 615b) can be a solid part. As a result, the game control board 610 has an observation mode for each of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c (for example,).
The observation mode of transmission observation described later) can be different.

Next, FIG. 72 (2) shows the details of the information display pattern 612. Information display pattern 61
Reference numeral 2 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 612a and the punching pattern 612b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is "Kou Co., Ltd." specified by the logo "KOH". The conductor pattern 612a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604. The conductor pattern 612a is composed of a flat conductor pattern surface that serves as a logo base. The punching pattern 612b is inside the logo base and does not have (pulls out) the conductor pattern, so that the logo is formed together with the conductor pattern 612a.

In this way, when different information is written side by side in the information display area 611, one piece of information is used as pattern formation information and the other piece of information is used as conductor pattern formation information. This will result in
The game control board 610 clarifies the division of two different pieces of information.

Next, FIG. 72 (3) shows a modified example of the information display pattern 612. Information display pattern 6
Reference numeral 13 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 613a and the punching pattern 613b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is "Kou Co., Ltd." specified by the logo "KOH". The conductor pattern 613a is independent of, that is, insulated from the GND pattern 604.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 613a has a via 613c and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. This limits the properties of the conductor pattern 613a that can be a noise source. It is desirable that the conductor pattern 613a is provided with one or more vias 613c in all of the independent conductor patterns, but the conductor pattern 613a may be limited to a part thereof.

Next, a second modification (modification 2) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. first,
FIG. 73 (1) shows the information display area 622 and the GND pattern 62 included in the game control board 620.
1 will be described. The game control board 620 is the game control board 60 of the fourth embodiment.
It differs from 0 in that it has an information display area 622 instead of the information display area 601 and that it has a GND pattern 621 instead of the GND pattern 604, and the same applies to the other points.

The information display area 622 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 620 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 620 as a short side. The information display area 622 divides the short side into two, and the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 622a, and the inner side is the information non-display unit 622b.

The information display unit 622a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information about the game control board 620 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 620.

The information non-display unit 622b is a solid area without a conductor pattern, and is an information display area 6.
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 623 and the GND pattern 621 from coming close to each other on the long side of the 22. As a result, the game control board 620 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the gaming control board 620. Further, in the game control board 620, the information display pattern 623 becomes a noise source and the influence on the GND pattern 621 is reduced.

The GND pattern 621 includes an information display unit 621a. The information display unit 621a is a GND.
The information display pattern 625, which displays information by removing the conductor pattern using the pattern 621 as a solid base, is displayed. The information display pattern 625 has a game control board 620 from its appearance.
Display the required information about. For example, the information display pattern 625 is a game control board 6.
The board control number of 20 is displayed. Such an information display pattern 625 is a game control board 6
While displaying the required information about 20, it is not necessary to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 621 in the game control board 620.

Further, in this way, when the game control board 620 describes different information side by side, one of the information is G.
The ND pattern 621 is used as solid-based punching pattern forming information, and the other information is used as conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 620 clarifies the division of two different information.

The information display area 622 and the information display unit 621a may be arranged close to each other.
They may be arranged separately. Further, the information display area 622 may be configured so as not requiring the information non-display unit 622b when the information display area 622 and the information display unit 621a are arranged close to each other.

Next, FIG. 73 (2) describes the information display area 628 and the GND pattern 629 of the game control board 627. The game control board 620 has an information display area 628 instead of the information display area 601 as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment.
It differs in that it has a GND pattern 629 instead of the GND pattern 604, and the same applies to the other points.

The information display area 628 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 627 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 627 as a short side. The information display area 628 includes an information display unit 628a.

The information display unit 628a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information about the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 620.

The GND pattern 629 includes an information display unit 629a and an information non-display unit 629b. The information display unit 629a displays an information display pattern 625 that displays information by removing the conductor pattern based on the GND pattern 629. The information display pattern 625 displays necessary information about the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, information display pattern 6
25 displays the board management number of the game control board 627. Such information display pattern 6
25 displays the required information regarding the game control board 627, while displaying the game control board 627.
It is not necessary to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 629 in.

The information non-display unit 629b is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface, and the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 6 are on the long side side of the information display area 628.
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the proximity of the 25 to the 25. As a result, the game control board 627 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 625. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the gaming control board 627.

Further, in this way, when the game control board 627 describes different information side by side, one of the information is G.
The ND pattern 629 is used as solid-based punching pattern forming information, and the other information is used as conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 627 clarifies the division of two different information.

The information display area 628 and the information display unit 629a may be arranged close to each other.
They may be arranged separately. Further, the GND pattern 629 may have a configuration that does not require the information non-display unit 629b when the information display area 628 and the information display unit 629a are arranged close to each other.

Next, a third modification (modification 3) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of an information display area of the third modification of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 630 is rectangular, and the information display area 632 is arranged in one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 632 is a rectangle having a corner portion at the lower left corner of the game control board 630 and having a long side and a short side. The information display area 632 includes an information display unit 632a and an information non-display unit 632b based on a solid area without a conductor pattern, and shares the same solid area as the screw hole 602a.

The information display area 632 divides the short side of the width d1 into two with the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 630 and the width d3 on the inner side. In the information display area 632, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 632a, and the internal side is the information non-display unit 632b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 632a has an information display pattern 634 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 634 displays necessary information about the game control board 630 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 634 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 630. Information display unit 6
Since the 32a shares the same solid part as the screw hole 602a, the information display unit 632a can be easily found with the screw hole 602a as a reference.

The information non-display portion 632b is a solid punching portion having no conductor pattern, and is an information display area 6.
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the proximity of the information display pattern 634 and the GND pattern 631 on the long side of the 32. As a result, the game control board 630 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 634. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the gaming control board 630. Further, in the game control board 630, the information display pattern 634 becomes a noise source and reduces the influence on the GND pattern 631. From this point of view, the game control board 63
For 0, it is desirable to set the information display unit 632a and the information non-display unit 632b by making the width d3 larger than the width d2.

Next, a fourth modification (transformation example 4) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 640 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 640 has the connector 530a shown in FIGS. 50 and 52.
, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, etc. are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 75 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 640, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 640 has an information display area 641 (indicated by diagonal hatching), screw holes 602a, and G on the surface thereof.
It has an ND pattern 642 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 641 displays control board information regarding the game control board 640. The information display area 641 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 642 based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 641 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 640.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 641. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 641 facing downward. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 642. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 640.

The GND pattern 642 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 642 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 641. As a result, G
The ND pattern 642 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 641 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. also,
The GND pattern 642 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 641 and the solid portion around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 642 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. The shape and size of the shown GND pattern 642 are merely examples and are not limited thereto. The GND pattern 642 is an information display area 64.
It suffices as long as it is located on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around 1 or the screw hole 602a, and may be more complicated or may have a size that spreads over the entire substrate.

FIG. 75 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 640, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
40 has an information display back surface area 644 (indicated by white), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 643 (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display back surface area 644 is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 641. The information display back surface area 644 is a solid portion having no conductor pattern. The game control board 640 makes it possible to partially transmit light in a region having no conductor pattern, and makes it impossible to transmit light in a region having a conductor pattern. This is because the base material constituting the game control board 640 allows a part of the light to pass through, and the conductor pattern blocks the light.

Here, the appearance of the information display area 641 at the time of observation will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Figure 7
6 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment looks when observed.

FIG. 76 (1) shows how the game control board 640 looks like a normal observation. The normal observation is an observation that relies on a light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 640. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under a sufficient amount of light. On the other hand, the game control board 640 has a screw hole 602a and an information display area 64 even under an insufficient amount of light.
In some cases, the position of the information display pattern 645 can be specified and tentative visibility can be obtained by using the positional relationship with 1 and the contrast between the GND pattern 642 and the information display area 641 as clues. However, the game control board 640 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display pattern 645 under an insufficient amount of light such as in a game hall installation environment.

FIG. 76 (2) shows how the transmission observation of the game control board 640 is useful when the light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 640 cannot be relied on. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 640, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 641 to make the contrast between the base of the information display area 641 and the conductor pattern stand out. be able to. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 640 by transmission observation.

As a result, the game control board 640 facilitates the position identification of the information display area 641. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation in the information display area 641. also,
The game control board 640 enables information observation relying on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in the game field installation environment of the game control board 640 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

The size, position, and shape of the information display area 641 and the information display back surface area 644 do not necessarily have to completely match. It suffices if the information display area 641 and the information display back surface area 644 overlap within a range in which transmission observation can be performed.

Next, a fifth modification (modification 5) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the information display area of the modified example 5 of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 650 is rectangular, and the information display area 651, 653 is arranged in one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 651 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 650 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 650 as a short side. The information display area 653 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 651, with one side along the long side of the information display area 651 as the long side.
Therefore, the information display area 653 faces the end of the game control board 650 with the information display area 651 interposed therebetween. In other words, the information display area 651 is located between the end of the game control board 650 and the information display area 653.

The information display area 651 is located in an area based on a solid area having no conductor pattern.
Information display pattern 652 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery
including.

The information display area 653 is provided in the GND pattern 655. The information display area 653 is
It is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface, and includes an information display pattern 654 formed by a print display (for example, silk printing or the like).

The information display pattern 652,654 displays necessary information about the game control board 650 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 652,654 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 650.

As described above, the game control board 650 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 652 and 654. Therefore, the game control board 650 has an information display pattern 652.
, 654, even if one of them is not sufficiently visible, it may be expected that the other is sufficiently visible. Further, the game control board 650 has an information display pattern 652,6.
Even if the visibility of both of 54 is not sufficient, sufficient visibility may be expected by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 650 can visually recognize the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 652 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be visually recognized due to insufficient light amount or light reflection. You may be able to do it. On the contrary, the game control board 650 has an information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern even when the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing cannot be visually recognized due to an insufficient amount of light or light reflection. 652 may be visible. In this way, the game control board 650
By arranging information display patterns 652 and 654 having different observation performances in parallel, it is possible to display information corresponding to a wider observation condition.

Further, as described in the modified example 4, the game control board 650 can also obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 652 by transmission observation by removing the back surface of the information display area 651. Although the game control board 650 is supposed to display the same information in different forms in the information display patterns 652 and 654, it may display different information. For example, the game control board 650 has the logo of the manufacturer of the game control board 650 in the information display area 653.
May be displayed by silk printing, and the manufacturer name of the game control board 650 may be displayed in the information display area 651 by a conductor pattern.

Next, a sixth modification (modification 6) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the modified example 6 of the fourth embodiment looks when observed. FIG. 78 (1) shows how the game control board 660 looks like a normal observation. The game control board 660 has a rectangular shape, and the information display areas 661 and 663 are arranged in one corner of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 661 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 660 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 660 as a short side. The information display area 663 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 661, with one side along the long side of the information display area 661 as the long side.
Therefore, the information display area 663 faces the end of the game control board 660 with the information display area 661 in between. In other words, the information display area 661 is located between the end of the game control board 660 and the information display area 663.

The information display area 661 is located in an area based on a solid area having no conductor pattern.
Information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern
including. The information display area 663 includes an information display pattern 664 formed by a print display (for example, silk printing or the like) in a region based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.

The information display pattern 662,664 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 660 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 662,664 displays the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 660.

The normal observation of the game control board 660 is an observation that relies on a light source that illuminates the surface of the game control board 660. The game control board 660 has an information display pattern 6622 under a sufficient amount of light.
Good visibility of 664 can be obtained. Further, the game control board 660 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 662 and 664. Therefore, even if the visibility of one of the information display patterns 662 and 664 is not sufficient, the game control board 660 may be expected to have sufficient visibility of the other. Also, the game control board 66
0 may be expected to be sufficient visibility by mutual complementation even when both of the information display patterns 662 and 664 are not sufficiently visible. For example, the game control board 660
Information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern due to insufficient light intensity or light reflection
The information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing may be visible even when the information display pattern 664 cannot be visually recognized. On the contrary, the game control board 660 has an information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern even when the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing cannot be visually recognized due to an insufficient amount of light or light reflection. 662 may be visible. As described above, the game control board 660 has information display patterns 662,66 having different observation performances.
By arranging 4 in parallel, information can be displayed corresponding to a wider observation condition.

On the other hand, the game control board 660 has a positional relationship between the screw holes 602a and the information display areas 661 and 663, and the GND pattern 665 and the information display areas 661, even under an insufficient amount of light.
In some cases, the position of the information display pattern 662,664 can be specified by using the contrast with 663 or the like as a clue to obtain prima facie visibility. However, the game control board 660 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display pattern 662,664 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game hall installation environment.

However, the game control board 660 has the information display area 661 as described in the modified example 4.
The back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid, and the back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid. FIG. 78 (2) shows how the transmission observation of the game control board 640 looks like this.

The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 660, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 661 to emphasize the contrast between the base of the information display area 661 and the conductor pattern. be able to. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 662 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation.

Since the back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid in the game control board 660, transmitted light cannot be observed in the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 cannot be expected to have good visibility of the information display pattern 664 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation. However, the game control board 660 can limit the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by the GND solid on the back surface of the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 can obtain better visibility of the information display pattern 664 in normal observation as compared with the case where the back surface of the information display area 663 is solid.

As a result, the game control board 660 facilitates the position identification of the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation in the information display area 661. also,
The game control board 660 enables information observation that relies on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in the game field installation environment of the game control board 660 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

It should be noted that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof do not necessarily have to completely match. It is sufficient that the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof overlap within a range where transmission observation can be performed.

Next, a seventh modification (deformation example 7) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 7 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 670 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 670 has the connector 530a shown in FIGS. 50 and 52.
, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, etc. are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 79 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 670, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 671 (indicated by diagonal hatching) and screw holes 602a, 6 on the surface thereof.
It has 02b and a GND pattern 672 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 671 displays control board information regarding the game control board 670. The information display area 671 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 672, based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 671 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 670. The information display area 671 is the game control board 670 with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down.
It is located at the lower left when observing the surface of.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 671. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing downward. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 672. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 670.

The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 671. The screw hole 602b is located in the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing downward.

The GND pattern 672 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 672 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 671. As a result, G
The ND pattern 672 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 671 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 671 on the game control board 670. Further, the GND pattern 672 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 671 and the solid area around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 672 in between, the screw hole 602a is also the information display area 671 in the game control board 670.
It has the role of clarifying the whereabouts of.

FIG. 79 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 670, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
70 has an information display area 673 (indicated by diagonal hatching) and screw holes 602a, 602 on the back surface.
It has b and a GND pattern 674 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 673 also displays the control board information regarding the game control board 670, similarly to the information display area 671. The information display area 673 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 674, based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 673 is rectangular, and one side thereof is a game control board 6.
It is provided in contact with one side of 70. The information display area 673 is also located at the lower left when the back surface of the game control board 670 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down, similarly to the information display area 671.

As described above, when the information display area 671 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 670, the information display area 673 is the game control board 67.
It is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the back surface (solder surface) of 0. That is, the game control board 670 arranges the information display area 673 on the back surface in the same positional relationship as the information display area 671 on the front surface.

Next, an eighth modification (deformation example 8) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. First, the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modified example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 8 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 680 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 680 has a connector 530 shown in FIGS. 50 and 52.
A, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, etc. are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 80 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 680, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 681 (indicated by diagonal hatching) and screw holes 602a, 6 on the surface thereof.
It has 02b and a GND pattern 682 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 681 displays control board information regarding the game control board 680. The information display area 681 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 682, based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 681 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 681 is the game control board 680 with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.
It is located at the lower left when observing the surface of.

The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 681. The screw hole 602a is located in the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 facing down. The screw hole 602a is provided in the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 682. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 680.

The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 681. The screw hole 602b is located in the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 facing down.

The GND pattern 682 is a GND (GND solid) having a flat conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the peripheral edge of the information display area 681. As a result, G
The ND pattern 682 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 681 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680. Further, the GND pattern 682 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid removal portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the information display area 681 and the solid area around the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 682 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a is also the information display area 681 in the game control board 680.
It has the role of clarifying the whereabouts of.

FIG. 80 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 680, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
80 has an information display area 683 (indicated by diagonal hatching) and screw holes 602a, 602 on the back surface.
It has b and a GND pattern 684 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 683 also displays the control board information regarding the game control board 680, similarly to the information display area 681. The information display area 683 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 684, based on the solid punched portion in which the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 683 is rectangular, and one side thereof is a game control board 6.
It is provided in contact with one side of 80. The information display area 683 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681, and is located at the lower right when the back surface of the game control board 680 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.

As described above, when the information display area 681 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 680, the information display area 683 is the game control board 68.
It is arranged at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface (solder surface) of 0 and corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681. That is, the game control board 680 arranges the information display area 683 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the information display area 681 on the front surface.

Next, the information display areas 681 and 683 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 shows the fourth
It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 8 of the embodiment. First, FIG. 81 (1) describes an information display position in the information display area 681. The information display area 681 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. In the information display area 681, the short side is divided into two, the end side of the divided area is the information display unit 681a, and the inner side is the information non-display unit 681b. The width of the short side divided into two may be the same or different.

The information display unit 681a has an information display pattern 685 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 685 displays necessary information about the game control board 680 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 685 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display portion 681b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and is an information display region 6
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 685 and the GND pattern 682 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the 81. As a result, the game control board 680 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 685. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the gaming control board 680.

Next, FIG. 81 (2) describes the information display position in the information display area 683.
The information display area 683 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. In the information display area 683, the short side is divided into two, the inner side of the divided area is the information display unit 683a, and the end side is the information non-display unit 6.
It is set to 83b. That is, the back surface of the information display unit 681a is the information non-display unit 683b.
The back surface of the information display unit 683a is an information non-display unit 681b. The width of the short side divided into two may be the same or different.

The information display unit 683a has an information display pattern 686 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 686 displays necessary information about the game control board 680 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 686 displays the manufacturer (or the sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display portion 683b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and is an information display region 6
It has a function as a gap for suppressing the information display pattern 686 and the end portion of the game control board 680 from coming close to each other on the long side side of the 81. As a result, the game control board 680 facilitates the position identification of the information display pattern 686 using the information non-display unit 683b as a clue. Such position identification is useful because the back surface of the game control board 680 is not a component mounting surface.
The gaming machine 10 makes it easy to check the gaming control board 680.

Next, the appearance of the information display areas 681 and 683 during transmission observation will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the modified example 8 of the fourth embodiment looks when observed.

The appearance of the transmission observation of the game control board 680 which is useful when the light source which irradiates the surface of the game control board 680 cannot be relied on is shown. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back surface side of the game control board 680, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 681 and 683 to make the base of the information display area 681 and 683 and the GND pattern. The contrast with the conductor patterns of 682,684 and the information display patterns 685,686 can be emphasized. The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 685 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by observing the transmission from the surface. Further, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 686 by observing the transmission from the surface, and the existence and position of the information display pattern 686 can be shown from the surface.

The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 686 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by observing the transmission from the back surface. Further, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 685 by transparent observation from the back surface, and the existence and position of the information display pattern 685 can be shown from the back surface.

As a result, the game control board 680 facilitates the position identification of the information display areas 681 and 683. Further, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation in the information display areas 681 and 683. Further, the game control board 680 enables information observation relying on the light leaking from the back surface side of the game machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. Further, the game control board 680 is not limited to the game field installation environment of the game control board 640, but also includes assembly processes, inspection processes, and the like.
It facilitates information observation that relies on transmitted light even in other work environments.

The size, position, and shape of the information display areas 681 and 683 do not necessarily have to completely match. It suffices if the information display areas 681 and 683 overlap in a range where transmission observation can be performed. Further, the information displayed by the information display patterns 685 and 686 does not necessarily have to be the same information, but may be different information. In addition, information display pattern 6
It is desirable that 85 and 686 do not overlap during transmission observation, but some of them may overlap because their existence can be easily grasped.

Next, a ninth modification (modification example 9) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board of the modification 9 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 690 is provided with necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 690 has the connector 530a shown in FIGS. 50 and 52.
, 530b, resistors 541, 542, processor 532, etc. are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 83 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 690, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 690 has a surface mount area 691 (indicated by diagonal hatching) on the surface. The surface mount area 691 is an area for mounting a surface mount component on the surface of the game control board 690. Surface mount components include, for example, SOP (Small Outline Package) and QFP (Quad Flat Pac).
There are IC packages such as kage), chip resistors, chip capacitors, connectors, etc.

The surface mount area 691 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The surface mount area 691 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 690 with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down. The surface mount area 691 is
It may be provided without touching one side of the game control board 690.

FIG. 83 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 690, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
90 has an information display area 692 (indicated by diagonal hatching) and a GND pattern 693 (indicated by diagonal hatching) on the back surface.
Has vertical line hatching). Since the surface mount area 691 does not have a through hole in the game control board 690, the information display area 692 can be arranged on the back surface of the surface mount area 691 without being damaged by the through hole.

The information display area 692 displays control board information regarding the game control board 690. The information display area 692 displays the control board information by the conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 693, based on the solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 692 is rectangular and is provided so that one side thereof is in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The information display area 692 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the surface mount area 691 and is a game control board 6.
It is located at the lower right when observing the back surface of the game control board 690 with one side in contact with 90 facing down.

As described above, when the surface mount area 691 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 690, the information display area 692 is the game control board 69.
It is the back surface (solder surface) of 0 and is arranged at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the surface mount area 691. That is, the game control board 690 arranges the information display area 692 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the surface mount area 691 on the front surface.

The game control board 690 may be one in which the surface mount component is surface-mounted in the surface mount region 691 during non-mass production and the surface mount component is not mounted in the surface mount region 691 during mass production. The non-mass production time is not the time of mass production, but the time of development or pre-mass production inspection, for example. Game control board 69
0 means surface mount a surface mount component (for example, a driver IC) for outputting an inspection signal at the time of development or inspection in the surface mount area 691. Further, the game control board 690 does not surface mount the surface mount component in the surface mount region 691 at the time of mass production, that is, at the time of operation in the market. As a result, the gaming machine 10 reduces the manufacturing cost of the gaming control board 690 and suppresses fraudulent acts based on the acquisition of the inspection signal. Further, the game control board 690 can facilitate transmission observation of the information display area 692 when the surface mount area 691 is made into a solid-free portion by not surface-mounting the surface mount component on the surface mount area 691. ..

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604,604a) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface.
A control board (for example, a game control board 600) capable of forming an information display pattern 605) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern (for example, information display area 601) in a predetermined area on the first surface, and an information display unit (for example, information display unit 606a) for displaying control board information related to the control board. The peripheral conductor pattern (eg, GND pattern 604)
A solid portion of the conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604a, information display back surface region 601a) formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 605) and at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface. (See FIGS. 70 and 71).

(2) The solid part of (1) has one side as the end of the control board, is in contact with the conductor pattern on the periphery on the other side, and displays information closer to the end of the control board than the conductor pattern on the periphery. The section is arranged (see FIG. 71 (1)).

(3) The control board information (for example, conductor pattern 607a) of (1) or (2) is
The solid portion of the conductor pattern provided on the second surface (for example, GND pattern 604a, information display back surface region 601a) and the via (for example, via 607b) are electrically connected (FIG. 71).
See (3)).

(4) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 642, 643) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 640) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern (for example, information display area 641) in a predetermined area on the first surface, and an information display part for displaying control board information related to the control board is provided with a peripheral conductor pattern (for example, information display area 641).
Conductor pattern independent of GND pattern 642) (for example, information display pattern 645)
), And a solid-free portion of the conductor pattern (for example, the information display back surface region 644) is provided at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface (see FIGS. 75 and 76).

(5) The information display unit of (4) has a conductor pattern on the periphery (for example, GND pattern 642).
) Is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, an information display pattern 645) (see FIG. 76 (1)).

(6) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 682,684) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 680) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern solid portion in a predetermined area of the first surface (for example, a lower left corner portion when the game control board 680 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and the control board information regarding the control board is provided. A first information display unit (for example, information display area 681) for displaying is formed by a conductor pattern.
A position corresponding to the first information display unit on the second surface (for example, the back side of the lower left corner when the game control board 680 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface, that is, the game control board 680 is oriented in a predetermined direction. A solid part of the conductor pattern is provided in the lower right corner when observed from the back surface, and a second information display part (for example, information display area 683) for displaying control board information related to the control board is formed by the conductor pattern. (See FIG. 80).

(7) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 672,674) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board that can be formed (for example, a game control board 670) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid conductor pattern solid portion in a predetermined area of the first surface (for example, a lower left corner portion when the game control board 670 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and the control board information regarding the control board is provided. A first information display unit (for example, information display area 671) for displaying is formed by a conductor pattern.
A solid conductor pattern is provided on the second surface at a position corresponding to the first information display unit (for example, the lower left corner when the game control board 670 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the back surface). A second information display unit (for example, information display area 673) for displaying control board information regarding the control board is formed by a conductor pattern (see FIG. 79).

(8) The gaming machine 10 can form a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 693) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 690) is provided. The control board is provided with a predetermined area (for example, surface mount area 691) on which a predetermined surface mount component (for example, IC package (SOP)) is mounted at the time of non-mass production and the surface mount component is not mounted at the time of mass production. , A second information display unit (for example, information display area 692) that displays control board information related to the control board.
A conductor pattern is formed and provided at a position corresponding to a predetermined region (for example, the back side of the surface mount region 691) on the surface of the surface (see FIG. 83).

(9) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604, information display pattern) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 610) capable of forming 612,613,614).
). The control board adjacently accommodates the first control board information (for example, the information displayed on the information display unit 615a) and the second control board information (for example, the information displayed on the information display unit 615b) regarding the control board. When displaying, either one of the first control board information and the second control board information is displayed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 613) formed in a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the other is a conductor. It is displayed by a punched pattern (for example, information display pattern 612) formed in a solid portion of the pattern (see FIG. 72).

(10) When the first control board information and the second control board information of (9) are displayed on the first surface, the second surface is the first control board information and the second control board. The region corresponding to one of the information is defined as the solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the region corresponding to the other is defined as the solid portion of the conductor pattern (see FIGS. 72 and 78).

(11) The first control board information and the second control board information of (9) or (10) are both conductor patterns (for example, information display patterns) independent of the peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604). It is displayed by 612,613) (see FIG. 72).

(12) The gaming machine 10 has a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface on the back surface side of the first surface.
A control board (for example, a game control board 620) capable of forming a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 621 and information display pattern 623) is provided on the front surface (for example, the back surface). The control board has an information display unit for displaying control board information related to the control board on the first surface and the second surface.
Ground solid (for example, GND pattern 604) of at least one of the surfaces of
) Is displayed (for example, information display pattern 625) (FIG. 7).
3).

(13) The gaming machine 10 has a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface on the back surface side of the first surface.
A control board (for example, a game control board 650) capable of forming a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 655, information display pattern 652) is provided on the surface (for example, the back surface). The control board provides control board information about the control board in the first form (for example, a conductor pattern).
A first information display unit (for example, information display pattern 652) to be displayed in, and a second information display unit (for example, silk printing) for displaying control board information in a second form (for example, silk printing) different from the first form.
For example, the information display pattern 654) and is included (see FIG. 77).

(14) The first information display unit and the second information display unit of (13) are arranged in parallel (see FIG. 77).
[Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment includes noise reduction components that enable stable operation even if there is a non-mounting area on the substrate on which electronic components are not mounted. Although the game control board will be described as an example of a board having a non-mounting area, it can also be applied to other boards such as an effect control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, and a lamp board. .. First, the game control device of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the game control device of the fifth embodiment.

The game control device 100b is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521 (see FIG. 48), similarly to the game control device 100. The game control device 100b includes a board box 520 similar to the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and the game control device 10 of the second embodiment.
A game control board 700 different from 0 is housed in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and has an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the lower opposite side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the board box 520, includes engaged portions 522a and 522b corresponding to the engaging portion 522, and locked portion 523a corresponding to the locking portion 523. To prepare for.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, mounts the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis, and then mounts the locking portion 523. By locking to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as a main structure, and the game control board 700 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

The caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw or the like) crimps the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking unit 524 makes it possible to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. Further, the substrate box 520 is provided with a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal is attached to the sealing portion 525 so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected depending on the state of the sealing seal.

The game control board 700 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 700 is a two-layer board in which a conductor pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 700 includes a test circuit arrangement area 701, a test connector arrangement area 702, an input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and an input signal connector arrangement area 704 on the component mounting surface.

The test circuit arrangement area 701 is an area in which the test circuit is arranged. The test connector arrangement area 702 is an area in which the test connector is arranged. The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 is an area in which the input signal circuit is arranged. The input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an area in which the input signal connector is arranged. The test circuit arrangement area 701 and the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 are arranged adjacent to the component mounting surface of the game control board 700.

The test connector makes it possible to connect a cable connecting the gaming machine 10 and an external device.
For example, the external device includes a test device for performing an operation test of the gaming machine 10, a verification device for performing an operation verification of the gaming machine 10, and the like. The input signal connectors are the game control board 700 and the game machine 1.
Makes it possible to connect cables that connect to the other boards of 0. Alternatively, the input signal connector makes it possible to connect a cable connecting the game control board 700 and the input sensor of the game machine 10.

The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 are indispensable areas for realizing the function as the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, the test circuit arrangement area 701
And the test connector arrangement area 702 is a redundant area in realizing the function as the gaming machine 10, and is an area for testing. The test applications include performance test applications, type test applications, and operation verification applications in the development process.

The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 are examples of a general circuit arrangement area and a general connector arrangement area originally used as a gaming machine. Therefore, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 are a circuit for an output signal, a connector for an output signal, a circuit for an input / output signal, a connector for an input / output signal, other circuits, and the like. It may be the area where the connector and the like of the above are arranged.

Next, the test circuit arrangement area 701, the test connector arrangement area 702, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 arranged on the component mounting surface of the game control board 700 will be described. do. First, a game control board on which no component is mounted will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is an example of a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (parts not mounted) of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The game control board 700a has a test circuit arrangement area 701 and a test connector arrangement area 702.
The state in which the component is not yet mounted on the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 (component non-mounting) is shown.

In the test circuit arrangement area 701, a circuit pattern 711 that enables mounting of electronic components for test signal input / output is arranged including a conductor pattern, through holes, vias, and the like. For example, in the circuit pattern 711, an integrated circuit IC2 that constitutes a buffer circuit as an electronic component and a bypass capacitor (decap) C2 that removes noise from a test circuit are integrated circuit IC2.
Can be mounted in the vicinity of. The test connector arrangement area 702 is an area in which the test connector CN2 for test signal input / output use can be mounted. A preferable example in the vicinity of the integrated circuit IC2 is a position close to the power supply pin and the ground pin of the integrated circuit IC2.

The test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702 are the test area range display 70.
5 specifies the range of the test mounting area. For example, the test area range display 705 clearly indicates the range of the test mounting area by the rectangular display of silk printing.

Further, in the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the name (use) of the test mounting area is clearly indicated by the test area name display 706. For example, the test area name display 706 clearly indicates the name of the mounting area for testing "for testing" by the rectangular display of silk printing.

Further, in the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the shape of the test component is clearly indicated by the test component shape display 707. For example, test part shape display 707
Indicates the outline of the integrated circuit IC2, the bypass capacitor C2, and the test connector CN2 by the outline display of silk printing.

Further, in the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the symbol of the test component is clearly indicated by the test component symbol display 708. For example, test part symbol display 708
Is an integrated circuit IC2 and a bypass capacitor C2 by silk-printed character display and number display.
, The part symbol of the test connector CN2 is specified.

In the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, a circuit pattern 712 that enables mounting of electronic components for general (game) signal input applications is arranged including a conductor pattern, through holes, vias, and the like. For example, the circuit pattern 712 includes an integrated circuit IC1 that constitutes a buffer circuit as an electronic component and a bypass capacitor C1 that removes noise from an input signal circuit.
It can be mounted near C1. The input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an area in which the input signal connector CN1 for general signal input use can be mounted. A preferable example in the vicinity of the integrated circuit IC1 is a position close to the power supply pin and the ground pin of the integrated circuit IC1.

In the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704, the shape of a general component is clearly indicated by the general component shape display 709. For example, general part shape display 70
Reference numeral 9 clearly indicates the outline of the integrated circuit IC1, the bypass capacitor C1, and the input signal connector CN1 by the outline display of silk printing.

Further, in the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704, the symbols of general parts are clearly indicated by the general part symbol display 710. For example, the general component symbol display 710 clearly indicates the component symbols of the integrated circuit IC1, the bypass capacitor C1, and the input signal connector CN1 by displaying characters or numbers in silk print.

Next, a game control board on which the components at the time of the test are mounted will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86
Is an example of a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (mounting parts at the time of testing) of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The game control board 700b has a test circuit arrangement area 701 and a test connector arrangement area 702.
The component mounting state (component mounting during test) at the time of testing of the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 is shown.

The test circuit arrangement area 701 includes a test IC 721 (integrated circuit IC 2) and a capacitor 72.
2 (bypass capacitor C2) is mounted, and the test connector 720 (test connector CN2) is mounted in the test connector arrangement area 702.

As a result, the capacitor 722 functions as a bypass capacitor for the test IC 721 and reduces noise associated with the operation of the test IC 721. Such a game control board 700b
Allows the test circuit to operate stably.

The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 mounts an input signal IC 724 (integrated circuit IC1) and a capacitor 725 (bypass capacitor C1), and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an input signal connector 723 (for input signal). Mount the connector CN1).

As a result, the capacitor 725 functions as a bypass capacitor for the input signal IC 724, and the noise associated with the operation of the input signal IC 724 is reduced. Such a game control board 700b enables the input signal circuit to operate stably.

Next, a game control board on which parts for mass production are mounted will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87
Is an example of a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (part mounting at the time of mass production) of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The game control board 700c has a test circuit arrangement area 701 and a test connector arrangement area 702.
The component mounting state (part mounting at the time of mass production) of the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 at the time of mass production is shown.

In the test circuit arrangement area 701, the capacitor 722 (bypass capacitor C2) is mounted, and the test IC 721 (integrated circuit IC2) is not mounted. Further, the test connector arrangement area 7
02 does not mount the test connector 720 (test connector CN2).

As a result, the game control board 700c physically prevents a third party from accessing the test signal. Further, the game control board 700c reduces the manufacturing cost at the time of mass production by not mounting the parts that are not originally required for the intended use.

The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 mounts an input signal IC 724 (integrated circuit IC1) and a capacitor 725 (bypass capacitor C1), and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an input signal connector 723 (for input signal). Mount the connector CN1).

As a result, the capacitor 725 functions as a bypass capacitor for the input signal IC 724, and the noise associated with the operation of the input signal IC 724 is reduced. Such a game control board 700c enables the circuit for input signals to operate stably.

Although the capacitor 722 does not function as a bypass capacitor for the test IC 721, it is expected to function as a noise reducing component of the circuit pattern 711. For example, the capacitor 722 suppresses that the circuit pattern 711 on which the test IC 721 is not mounted serves as an antenna and becomes a noise source. Further, the capacitor 722 assists the function as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725.

Here, the function assist as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725 by the capacitor 722 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply pattern and a ground pattern in which the bypass capacitor of the fifth embodiment is installed.

The capacitor 722 and the capacitor 725 are mounted so as to be erected on the common power supply pattern 727 and the common ground pattern 726. Power pattern 727 and ground pattern 72
At least one of 6 is composed of an island-shaped conductor pattern on the component mounting surface or the solder surface of the game control board 700. For example, the power supply pattern 727 is a game control board 7.
It is an island-shaped conductor pattern on the solder surface of 00, and is electrically connected to the power supply pattern on the component mounting surface via vias (not shown). Further, the ground pattern 726 is an island-shaped conductor pattern on the solder surface of the game control board 700, and is electrically connected to the ground pattern on the component mounting surface via vias (not shown).

Such a power supply pattern 727 and a ground pattern 726 may become an antenna when the test IC 721 is not mounted, and may become a noise source in the input signal circuit. However, the game control board 700 has a power supply pattern 727 and a ground pattern 726.
By erection and mounting the capacitor 722, it is possible to reduce or suppress that the power supply pattern 727 and the ground pattern 726 become a noise source. Further, in the game control board 700, in addition to the capacitor 725, the capacitor 722 is used as a power supply pattern 727 and a ground pattern 726.
By erection and mounting on the capacitor 725, the function as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725 can be assisted by the capacitor 722.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can operate stably even if there is a non-mounting area on the substrate on which electronic components are not mounted. Further, the gaming machine 10 enables stable operation of an input signal circuit that requires more reliable signal input.

The capacitors 722 and 725 are examples of noise reduction components, and the noise reduction components may be composed of a resistor, a capacitor, a coil, other passive elements, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a first function (for example, a test signal output function, non-test signal output function) related to connection with an external device (for example, a test device) by mounting a first integrated circuit (for example, a test IC721). By mounting a first circuit (for example, a test circuit) that realizes a game-use function and a non-mass-use use function and a second integrated circuit (for example, an input signal IC 724), a second circuit that is not related to connection with an external device is used. 2 functions (for example, signal input function, game use function, mass production use function)
A board (for example, a game control board 700) including a second circuit (for example, an input signal circuit) for realizing the above is provided. The board is the first, in which the first integrated circuit can be mounted but not mounted.
(For example, the test circuit arrangement area 701) and the second area (for example, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703) on which the second integrated circuit is mounted are arranged adjacent to each other. The first circuit connects the first power supply line (for example, the conductor pattern connecting the power supply pin of the test IC 721 and the power supply) connecting the first integrated circuit and the power supply, and the first integrated circuit and the ground. Includes a first ground line (eg, a conductor pattern connecting the ground pin of the test IC 721 to the ground) and a first noise reducing component (eg, a capacitor 722) that reduces noise in the first integrated circuit. The second circuit is a second power supply line connecting the second integrated circuit and the power supply (for example, a conductor pattern connecting the power supply pin of the input signal IC 724 and the power supply).
And a second ground line connecting the second integrated circuit and the ground (for example, a conductor pattern connecting the ground pin and the ground of the input signal IC 724) and a second integrated circuit to reduce noise. Includes noise reduction components (eg, capacitor 725). 1st
The power supply line and the second power supply line are the first conductor pattern (for example, the power supply pattern 7).
27) Share. The first ground line and the second ground line share a second conductor pattern (eg, ground pattern 726). The first noise reducing component and the second noise reducing component are mounted so that the first conductor pattern and the second conductor pattern are erected (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the harness connected to the board can be removed and removed by covering the removal operation portion of the harness connected to the connector on the board with the cable of the harness. Make sex difficult. Such a gaming machine of the sixth embodiment makes it difficult to perform fraudulent activities involving the operation of removing and removing the harness from the board. FIG. 89 will be described with reference to a substrate and a harness that make it difficult to remove and remove the harness connected to the substrate while making it possible to remove and remove the harness. FIG. 8
9 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the substrate and harness of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 89 (1) shows an overview of the substrate 733 and the harness 736 by side observation, and FIG. 89 (2) shows.
) Shows an overview of the substrate 733 and the harness 736 by frontal observation (upward observation). Board 733
Is sandwiched between the upper board box 730 and the lower board box 732, and is sandwiched between the upper board box 73 and the upper board box 73.
It is housed in 0 and the lower board box 732. The board 733 includes a board-side connector 734 to be connected to the harness 736 at the end of the component mounting surface. The board side connector 734 is
It faces the outside of the board accommodating space from the opening 731 of the upper board box 730. The board-side connector 734 is connected to the harness-side connector 737 of the harness 736.
The harness-side connector 737 has a locking claw 739 and engages with the locking receiving portion 735 of the board-side connector 734. Further, the harness side connector 737 has an operation unit 738. The operation unit 738 makes it possible to release the engagement state with the locking receiving unit 735. For example, the operation unit 738 can release the engagement state between the locking claw 739 and the locking receiving portion 735 by a pushing operation by the operator.

The harness 736 is locked with a cable by the locking portion 729. Harness 736
The routing direction of the cable is restricted to the locking portion 729 side, and the cable is routed in the direction covering the operating portion 738. The cable covering the operation unit 738 not only reduces the operability of the operation unit 738, but also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

The harness 736 is routed by the locking portion 729, and the play amount of the cable in the height direction is restricted so as not to exceed the height of the upper board box 730. As a result, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable directly above the operation unit 738 is d1 lower than the height of the upper board box 730.

The cable in which the amount of play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable that covers the operation unit 738 with the limited amount of play is the operation unit 7.
Not only the operability of the 38 is further lowered, but also the visibility of the operation unit 738 is further lowered.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the substrate 733 detachable, but make the detachable workability difficult. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities. The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to provide a sufficient working environment to a legitimate worker by making it possible to release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729. Even if the gaming machine 10 can release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729, the gaming machine 10 forces the fraudster to release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729, and deters the fraudulent activity. Can hold power.

It is desirable that the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 is larger than the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, it is desirable that the width of the operation unit 738 is smaller than the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736. Further, the gaming machine 10 can preferably cover the operation unit 738 with the cable by aligning the central axis of the operation unit 738 with the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 and routing the cable.

Next, the inhibition of the pull-out workability of the harness connecting the two boards arranged side by side in the lateral direction will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of two boards arranged side by side in the horizontal direction of the sixth embodiment and a harness connecting the two boards.

The harness 736 is provided with a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness-side connector 737 is a board-side connector (a board-side connector included in the board 733).
(Not shown) and connect to the connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) included in the board 741. As a result, the harness 736 connects two substrates 733 and 741 arranged side by side in the lateral direction.

The board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 741 face each other in the lateral direction. Therefore, the harness 736 includes the board-side connector and the board 7 included in the board 733.
It is suspended in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) with the board-side connector included in the 41. Harness 736
The cable routing direction is restricted from both the boards 733 and 741, and the operation unit 738 included in the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739, and the substrate 741 has a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737. Has the function as.

In the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 741 face each other in the lateral direction, and the central shafts of the operation units 738 and 740 and the harness 73 are opposed to each other.
By aligning the central axis of the cable bundle of 6 and routing the cable, the operation unit 738, 7 is suitably used.
40 can be covered with a cable. Since the harness 736 is suspended in the horizontal direction, the operation units 738 and 740 can be covered with cables to the same extent.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the substrate 733 and 741 removable, but makes it difficult to remove and remove the harness. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Next, the inhibition of the pull-out workability of the harness connecting the two boards arranged side by side in the vertical direction will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of two substrates arranged side by side in the vertical direction of the sixth embodiment and a harness connecting the two substrates.

The harness 736 is provided with a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness-side connector 737 is a board-side connector (a board-side connector included in the board 733).
(Not shown) and connect to the connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) included in the board 742. As a result, the harness 736 connects two substrates 733 and 742 arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

The board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 742 face each other in the vertical direction. Therefore, the harness 736 includes the board-side connector and the board 7 included in the board 733.
It is suspended in the vertical direction (vertical direction) with the board-side connector included in the 42. Harness 736
The cable routing direction is restricted from both the boards 733 and 742, and the operation unit 738 included in the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739, and the substrate 742 is a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737. Has the function as. Further, the harness 736 is strongly restricted in the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737 than in the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739 due to its own weight.

In the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 742 are opposed to each other in the vertical direction, and the central axis of the operation units 738 and 740 and the harness 73 are opposed to each other.
By aligning the central axis of the cable bundle of 6 and routing the cable, the operation unit 738, 7 is suitably used.
40 can be covered with a cable. Since the harness 736 is suspended in the vertical direction, it is possible to cover the operation unit 738 with a cable, making it more difficult to remove and remove the harness 736 than the operation unit 740.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the boards 733 and 742 removable, but makes it difficult to remove and remove the harness. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Next, the impediment of the pull-out workability of the harness connecting the two boards having different orientations of the connectors and the connectors not facing each other will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of two boards in which the connectors of the sixth embodiment have different orientations and the connectors do not face each other, and a harness connecting the two boards.

The harness 736 is provided with a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness-side connector 737 is a board-side connector (a board-side connector included in the board 733).
(Not shown) and connect to the connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) included in the board 743. As a result, the harness 736 connects two substrates 733 and 743 that are arranged so as to be offset in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction (offset arrangement in different directions).

The board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 743 face different directions and do not face each other. That is, the central axis of the operation unit 738 and the central axis of the operation unit 740 are
The orientation is different only by the angle A. Therefore, when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 743, the cable routing direction is restricted from both the boards 733 and 743, and the harness-side connector is restricted. 73
The operation unit 738 included in 7 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with a cable.

Therefore, when the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 743 do not face each other in different directions, the gaming machine 10 replaces the boards 733 and 743 with the locking piece 7.
44,745 regulates the routing direction of the harness 736. As a result, in the harness 736, the cable routing direction is restricted from both the locking pieces 744 and 745, and the operation unit 7 included in the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 7 included in the harness-side connector 739.
Cover 40 with a cable.

At this time, the locking piece 744 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737, and the locking piece 745 regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739. It has a function as a locking portion.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is suitable by facing the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the locking piece 744, and aligning the central axes of both and the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable. The operation unit 738 can be covered with a cable. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector included in the board 743 and the locking piece 745 are opposed to each other, and the central axes of both are aligned with the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable.
The operation unit 740 can be preferably covered with a cable.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the boards 733 and 743 removable, but makes it difficult to remove the harness. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

The locking piece 744 is locked with the connector on the opposite board side so that the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 is wider than the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, the locking piece 744 narrows the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to the opposite board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 738 and does not lock. Similarly, the locking piece 745 engages with the opposite board-side connector with the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 wider than the width of the operation unit 740. In other words, the locking piece 745 is not locked by narrowing the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to the opposite board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 740.

The locking pieces 744,745 have the width of the cable bundle between the two operating units 738,7.
The cable bundle of the harness 736 can be held so as to be narrower than the width of 40.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be compactly harnessed between the locking pieces 744 and 745.
36 cable bundles can be routed.

Next, the inhibition of the pull-out workability of the harness connecting two boards having the same orientation of the connectors but having a large offset and the connectors not facing each other will be described with reference to FIG. 93.
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of two boards having the same orientation of the connectors of the sixth embodiment but having a large offset and the connectors do not face each other, and a harness connecting the two boards.

The harness 736 is provided with a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness-side connector 737 is a board-side connector (a board-side connector included in the board 733).
(Not shown) and connect to the connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) included in the board 746. As a result, the harness 736 connects two boards 733 and 746 that are arranged at a large offset (offset arrangement in the same direction) although the orientations of the connectors are the same. The large offset here means that when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the two board-side connectors, the cable routing direction is restricted from both board-side connectors, and the operation unit provided in the harness-side connector 737 is provided. It refers to an offset (displacement amount) d2 to the extent that the 738 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with a cable.

That is, when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 746, the cable routing direction is restricted from both the boards 733 and 746, and the harness-side connector is used. The operation unit 738 included in the 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with a cable.

Therefore, when the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 746 have a large offset, the gaming machine 10 replaces the boards 733 and 746 with the locking piece 747.
, 748 regulates the routing direction of the harness 736. As a result, the harness 73
In No. 6, the cable routing direction is restricted from both the locking pieces 747 and 748, and the operation unit 738 included in the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 are provided.
And cover with a cable.

At this time, the locking piece 747 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737, and the locking piece 748 regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739. It has a function as a locking portion.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 is suitable by facing the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the locking piece 747, and aligning the central axes of both and the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable. The operation unit 738 can be covered with a cable. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector included in the board 746 and the locking piece 748 are opposed to each other, and the central axes of both are aligned with the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable.
The operation unit 740 can be preferably covered with a cable.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the boards 733 and 746 removable, but makes it difficult to remove and remove the harness. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

The locking piece 747 is locked with the connector on the opposite board side so that the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 is wider than the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, the locking piece 747 is not locked by narrowing the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to the opposite board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 738. Similarly, the locking piece 748 engages with the opposite board-side connector with the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 wider than the width of the operation unit 740. In other words, the locking piece 748 is not locked by narrowing the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to the opposite board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 740.

It should be noted that the locking pieces 747 and 748 have the width of the cable bundle between the two operating units 738 and 7.
The cable bundle of the harness 736 can be held so as to be narrower than the width of 40.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be compactly harnessed between the locking pieces 747 and 748.
36 cable bundles can be routed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the hindrance to the pull-out workability of the harness connecting the two boards to which only a part of the connectors faces each other due to the offset of the connectors having the same orientation will be described.
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of two boards having the same orientation of the connectors of the sixth embodiment but having only a part of the connectors facing each other due to the offset, and a harness connecting the two boards.

The harness 736 is provided with a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness-side connector 737 is a board-side connector (a board-side connector included in the board 733).
(Not shown) and connect to the connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) included in the board 747. As a result, the harness 736 connects two boards 733 and 747 in which the orientations of the connectors are the same but only a part of the connectors is opposed to each other (offset arrangement in the same direction) due to the offset. Note that the offset in which only a part of the connectors face each other here is such that when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the two board-side connectors, the cable routing direction is restricted from both board-side connectors, and the harness is used. The offset (shift amount) d3 to the extent that the operation unit 738 included in the side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness side connector 739 can be suitably covered with a cable.

A part of the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 747 face each other in the vertical direction. Therefore, the harness 736 is suspended in the diagonally vertical direction between the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 747. Harness 73
In 6, the cable routing direction is restricted from both the boards 733 and 747, and the operation unit 738 included in the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 739, and the substrate 747 is a locking portion that regulates the cable routing direction from the harness-side connector 737. Has the function as.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 has an offset between the board-side connector included in the board 733 and the board-side connector included in the board 747, and even if only a part thereof is opposed to each other in the vertical direction, as long as the offset is small. Can preferably cover the operation units 738 and 740 with a cable.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the boards 733 and 747 removable, but makes it difficult to remove and remove the harness. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Next, a modification 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. The locking portion 729 of the sixth embodiment is restricted so that the height of the cable directly above the operating portion 738 is lower than the height of the upper board box 730 by d1, but is a modification of the sixth embodiment. The locking portion of Example 1 is more preferably constrained. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the substrate and harness of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment by side observation. Regarding the same configuration as the sixth embodiment,
The symbols are the same and the description is omitted.

The harness 736 is locked with a cable by the locking piece 748. The locking piece 748 locks the cable of the harness 736 below the component mounting surface, more preferably below the bottom surface of the board box. The component mounting surface is the component mounting surface of the board 733, and is the mounting surface of the board-side connector 734 to which the harness-side connector 737 is connected to the connector. The bottom surface of the board box is the bottom surface of the lower board box 732.

As a result, the routing direction of the cable of the harness 736 is restricted to the locking piece 748 side, and the harness 736 is routed in the direction of covering the operation portion 738. The cable that covers the operation unit 738 is the operation unit 73.
Not only does it reduce the operability of 8, but it also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

The harness 736 is strongly restricted in the amount of play of the cable in the height direction so as not to exceed the height of the upper board box 730 due to the routing by the locking piece 748. As a result, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable directly above the operation unit 738 is d1 lower than the height of the upper board box 730. The locking piece 748 may lock the cable of the harness 736 so that the cable of the harness 736 comes into contact with the side wall 732a of the board box.

The cable in which the amount of play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable that covers the operation unit 738 with the limited amount of play is the operation unit 7.
Not only the operability of the 38 is further lowered, but also the visibility of the operation unit 738 is further lowered.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the substrate 733 detachable, but make the detachable workability difficult. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities. The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to provide a sufficient working environment to a legitimate worker by making it possible to release the locked state of the cable by the locking piece 748. Even if the gaming machine 10 can release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729, the gaming machine 10 forces the fraudster to release the locked state of the cable by the locking piece 748, and deters the fraudulent activity. Can hold power.

Next, the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The cable of the sixth embodiment is constrained by the locking piece or the substrate, but the locking portion of the second modification of the sixth embodiment constrains the cable regardless of the locking piece or the substrate. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the substrate and harness of the second modification of the sixth embodiment by side observation. The same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

The upper board box 730 and the lower board box 732 are mounted on the mounting base 749. The mounting base 749 has a plate shape that is one size larger than the lower board box 732, and the mounting base side wall 749a projects from the board box side wall 732a. Harness 736
The mounting base side wall 749a regulates the cable routing direction.

That is, the cable of the harness 736 is routed from the harness side connector 737 to the mounting base side wall 749a, and then routed from the mounting base side wall 749a in the folded direction. In this way, the mounting base side wall 749a routes the cable of the harness 736 below the bottom surface of the board box.

As a result, the wiring direction of the cable of the harness 736 is restricted to the mounting base side wall 749a, and the harness 736 is routed in the direction of covering the operation portion 738. The cable covering the operation unit 738 not only reduces the operability of the operation unit 738, but also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

The harness 736 is strongly restricted in the amount of play of the cable in the height direction so as not to exceed the height of the upper board box 730 by being routed through the mounting base side wall 794a. As a result, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable directly above the operation unit 738 is d1 lower than the height of the upper board box 730. The mounting base side wall 794a has a harness 73 so that the cable of the harness 736 comes into contact with the board box side wall 732a.
The cable of 6 may be locked.

The cable in which the amount of play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable that covers the operation unit 738 with the limited amount of play is the operation unit 7.
Not only the operability of the 38 is further lowered, but also the visibility of the operation unit 738 is further lowered.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the harness 736 connected to the substrate 733 detachable, but make the detachable workability difficult. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform difficult work, but improves the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Although the harness 736 is restricted to the mounting base side wall 749a in the cable routing direction, it may be a substitute for the mounting base 749 as long as it is a structural material that supports the substrate 733. For example, the harness 736 may have the cable routing direction restricted to the lower board box 732.

Since such a structural material is generally sufficiently larger than the operation unit 738, it is possible to easily construct a relationship in which the end portion of the structural material and the operation unit 738 face each other. Therefore, the operation unit 738 can be easily covered by the cable bundle. Further, even if there are two or more harnesses to be connected to the board 733, it is not necessary to prepare a locking portion for each harness.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a substrate (for example, a substrate 733), a harness for connecting a connector to the substrate (for example, harness 736), and a locking portion (for example, a locking portion 729) for locking the harness outside the substrate. ) And. On the board, the board-side connector (for example, the board-side connector 734) is arranged so that the disconnection / removal operation unit (for example, the operation unit 738) of the harness-side connector (for example, the harness-side connector 737) faces the outer edge of the board when the connector is connected. Set up. The harness covers the extraction / removal operation portion when locked by the locking portion (see FIG. 89).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a substrate (for example, a substrate 733), a harness for connecting a connector to the substrate (for example, harness 736), and a structural material for supporting the substrate (for example, a mounting base 749). On the board, when the connector is connected, the board-side connector (for example, the board-side connector 734) is arranged so that the disconnection / removal operation unit (for example, the operation unit 738) of the harness-side connector (for example, the harness-side connector 737) faces the outer edge of the structural material. Set up. The harness covers the extraction / removal operation portion when the routing direction is restricted by the structural material (see FIG. 96).

[7th Embodiment]
The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has an external information terminal board in which the operation unit is displayed by silk printing instead of the external information terminal board 71 of the first embodiment. First, an overview of the external information terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the external information terminal board according to the seventh embodiment.

The external information terminal board 750 includes an external information terminal board 751, a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 758. The external information terminal board 751 has a connector 752.
And the information output terminal 753 and the photocoupler 758 are mounted on the component mounting surface. The external information terminal board 750 includes one connector 752 (T1). The external information terminal board 750 is connected to the game control device 100 via a harness connected to the connector 752.

The information output terminal 753 is a terminal capable of outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information terminal board 750 has 10 information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10).
Are prepared in a row. Five information output terminals 753 from CN1 to CN5 and CN6 to CN
The five information output terminals 753 of 10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 751 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is set wider than the arrangement interval with other information output terminals 753. The gap between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is 10 information output terminals 753.
It can be used as a guide for confirming the position of. The 10 information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) are easily identified by being given different colors, but the same colors may be given for cost reduction. ..

The information output terminal 753 can be connected to a one-to-two wire. The information output terminal 753 includes electric wire connecting portions 756 and 757, and one electric wire can be connected to each of the information output terminals 753. Wire connection part 7
56,757 has an opening into which an electric wire can be inserted. The opening of the electric wire connecting portions 756 and 757 is normally closed by a lid body urged by an urging portion (for example, a spring) (not shown). The lid of the electric wire connecting portion 756 is moved against the urging by the urging portion by the pressing operation of the short operation lever 754, and the opening is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the short operating lever 754 is no longer pressed, the electric wire connecting portion 756 returns the short operating lever 754 to the initial position due to the urging by the urging portion, and the lid is moved to close the opening from the open state. It can be switched to the state. The lid of the electric wire connecting portion 757 is moved against the urging by the urging portion by the pressing operation of the long operation lever 755, and the opening is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the long operation lever 755 is no longer pressed, the long operation lever 755 returns to the initial position due to the urging by the urging portion, and the lid is moved to open the opening of the electric wire connection portion 757. Can be switched to the blocked state.

The photocoupler 758 is one of the isolation means for outputting information while being electrically isolated from an external device such as a hall computer. Therefore, the external information terminal board 750 may use a non-contact relay such as a phototransistor or a contact relay such as a mechanical relay instead of the photocoupler 758. In that case, the external information terminal board 75
0 can include passive elements such as resistors and capacitors in the configuration of the isolation means.

The external information terminal board 750 includes 10 photocouplers 758 (PC1 to PC10) in a row. The five photocouplers 758 from PC1 to PC5 and the five photocouplers 758 from PC6 to PC10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 751 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the photocoupler 758 of the PC 5 and the photocoupler 758 of the PC 6 is set wider than the arrangement interval of the other photocouplers 758. The gap between the photocoupler 758 of the PC 5 and the photocoupler 758 of the PC 6 can be used as a guide for confirming the positions of the ten photocouplers 758. Each of the photocouplers 758 includes a first terminal symbol 759 that clearly indicates the position of the first terminal. The first terminal symbol 759 is indicated by, for example, a circle marking.

Further, the photocoupler 758 is provided as a pair with the information output terminal 753, and is arranged side by side with the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) of the information output terminal 753. For example, the photocoupler 758a (PC10) has an information output terminal 753a (CN10).
Between the operation shaft 754b of the short operation lever 754a and the operation shaft 755b of the long operation lever 755a of the information output terminal 753a, on the opposite side of the operation unit (short operation lever 754a, long operation lever 755a). It is installed side by side.

Next, an overview of the external information terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the external information terminal board of the seventh embodiment.
The external information terminal board 751 shown in FIG. 98 shows a state in which components such as a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 758 are not mounted. The external information terminal board 751 has a component shape display 760, a component symbol display 761, and an operation unit display 76 by silk display on the component mounting surface.
2 and the identification auxiliary display 763 are included. The external information terminal board 751 displays a component shape display 760, a component symbol display 761, an operation unit display 762, and an identification auxiliary display 763 in an aspect other than the silk display (for example, a conductor pattern display). May be good.

The component shape display 760 is a display showing the mounting position of the component in the approximate shape of the component. For example, the component shape display 760 has a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 7.
The mounting position of parts such as 58 is indicated by a rectangle.

The part symbol display 761 is a display of a symbol that can uniquely identify a part. For example, "CN1" which is one of the component symbol display 761 indicates that the mounted component is the information output terminal 753, and "PC1" which is one of the component symbol display 761 indicates that the mounted component is a photocoupler 758. "T1", which is one of the component symbol indications 761 indicating that there is, is that the mounted component is the connector 752.
Indicates that.

The operation unit display 762 displays an outline of the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) of the information output terminal 753. The operation unit display 762 includes a short rectangular display and a long rectangular display. The short rectangular display indicates the approximate shape and operating position of the short operating lever 754, and the long rectangular display indicates the approximate shape and operating position of the long operating lever 755.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide operation guidance by the operation unit display 762. Such a gaming machine 10 is an operation unit (short operation lever 75) in the external information terminal board 750.
4. Provide a suitable operating environment for the long operating lever 755).

Further, the gaming machine 10 can compare the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) with the operation unit display 762, and can easily detect an abnormality when the operation unit is broken or the like. ..

The identification auxiliary display 763 clearly indicates different colors attached to the 10 information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) by character information. For example, the character information "white" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in white. Further, the character information "Midori" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in green. The character information "high" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in gray. The character information "kiiro" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in yellow. The character information "black" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in black. The character information "pink" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in pink. The character information "Ao" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in blue. The character information "red" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in red. The character information "die" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored orange. The character information "mizu" indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored in light blue.

The part shape display 760 is difficult to see due to the mounting of parts, but the part symbol display 761
The operation unit display 762 and the identification auxiliary display 763 are easily visually displayed even when parts are mounted.

Next, the operation state of the information output terminal 753 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of an operating state of the external information terminal according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 99 (1) shows the locked state of the information output terminal 753.

The information output terminal 753 is in a locked state when the openings of the electric wire connecting portions 756 and 757 are closed. At this time, the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) is in the initial position, and is urged by the urging unit to hold the initial position.

The short operation lever 754 extends horizontally (horizontally shown) by a distance d1 from the main body of the information output terminal 753, and has a gap h1 in height from the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751. The long operation lever 755 extends horizontally from the main body of the information output terminal 753 by a distance d2 larger than the distance d1, and has a gap h2 lower than the height h1 with the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751. Has.

FIG. 99 (2) shows the release state of the information output terminal 753. The information output terminal 753 is in a released state when the openings of the electric wire connecting portions 756 and 757 are opened. At this time, the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) is in a position where the operator presses against the urging of the urging unit, and the release state is maintained by the pressing operation.

The short operation lever 754 is in a state of being rotated around a fulcrum (not shown) by a pressing operation, and has a gap h3 lower than the height h1 with the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751. .. The long operation lever 755 is in a state of being rotated around a fulcrum (not shown) as a rotation axis by a pressing operation, and has a height h2 and a height h3 between the long operation lever 755 and the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751.
It has a gap of only lower height h4.

As described above, the information output terminal 753 is targeted by the operator because the operation positions of the operation units (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) differ not only in the horizontal direction but also in the height direction. Makes the operation unit easily recognizable.

In the external information terminal board 750, the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755 are alternately arranged in all the information output terminals 753, so that the external information terminal board 750 is not limited to one information output terminal 753, but all information output terminals. In 753, the operation unit to be operated by the operator can be easily recognized.

Next, FIG. 1 shows a modification of the component arrangement in the external information terminal board 750 according to the seventh embodiment.
It will be described with reference to 00 and FIGS. 101 to 102. FIG. 100 shows a modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.
It is a figure (the 1) which shows the arrangement example of the external information terminal of the above, and other parts. FIG. 101 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of arrangement of an external information terminal and other parts according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of a photocoupler and a resistor according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment.

In the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 100 (1), a resistor 765 is arranged on the operation unit side. The resistor 765 is one of the passive elements included in the isolation means. The resistor 765 rides on the axis of the operating shaft 754L of the short operating lever 754, and the operating shaft 75 of the long operating lever 755.
It is placed at a position not on the 5L axis. From another point of view, the resistor 765 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operating lever 754. However, the resistor 765 may be arranged inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operating lever 755. As a result, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can arrange the information output terminal 753 and the resistance 765 at high density without affecting the operability.
Therefore, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compactly. Further, the arrangement of the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 is such that the short operation lever 75 is arranged.
It suggests which side the 4 and the long operation lever 755 are on with respect to the information output terminal 753.
Further, since the arrangement of the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 secures the same space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755, the external information terminal board 7
The workability of inspection and confirmation of 50 is not impaired.

In the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 100 (2), a photocoupler 766 is arranged on the operation unit side. The photocoupler 766 is one of the relay elements included in the isolation means.
The photocoupler 766 is arranged at a position where it rides on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and does not ride on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. From another viewpoint, the photocoupler 766 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operating lever 754. However, the photocoupler 766 may be arranged inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operating lever 755. As a result, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can arrange the information output terminal 753 and the photocoupler 766 at high density without affecting the operability. Therefore, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compactly. In addition, the information output terminal 7
The arrangement of the photocoupler 766 with respect to 53 is as follows: short operation lever 754 and long operation lever 75.
It suggests which side 5 is on the information output terminal 753. In addition, the information output terminal 75
The arrangement of the photocoupler 766 with respect to 3 is as follows: short operation lever 754 and long operation lever 755.
Since the same level of space is secured below each of the above, the workability of inspection and confirmation of the external information terminal board 750 is not impaired.

The resistance 765 shown in FIG. 100 (1) and the photocoupler 76 shown in FIG. 100 (2).
Reference numeral 6 is arranged outside of both the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754 and the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755, as in the photocoupler 766 shown in FIG. 100 (3). It may be. As a result, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment has the information output terminal 753 and the photocoupler 766 arranged at high density.
Sufficient operability is ensured for the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755).

The information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (1) has a resistor 765 and a photocoupler 7 on the operation unit side.
Arrange 66. The photocoupler 766 is arranged at a position where it rides on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and does not ride on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. From another viewpoint, the photocoupler 766 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operating lever 754. However, the photocoupler 766 has a long operation lever 755.
It may be arranged inside the horizontal interference line L2 of. Resistance 765 is
It is arranged at a position where it rides on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755 and does not ride on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754. From another point of view, the resistor 765 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operating lever 754. However, resistance 76
Reference numeral 5 may be arranged inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operating lever 755.

The photocoupler 766 is taller than the resistor 765. In other words,
The resistance 765 is shorter than the photocoupler 766. Therefore, resistance 765
Does not interfere with either the short operating lever 754 or the long operating lever 755 as long as the height of the component is lower than the height h4 (see FIG. 99). Further, the photocoupler 766 does not interfere with the short operation lever 754 as long as the height of the component is lower than the height h3 (see FIG. 99).

As a result, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can arrange the information output terminal 753, the photocoupler 766, and the resistor 765 at high density without affecting the operability. The photocoupler 766 and the resistor 765 are examples of mounting components having different heights, and may be a combination of other mounting components. Further, the arrangement of the photocoupler 766 and the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 is such that the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 75 are arranged.
Since the same level of space is secured below each of 5, the workability of inspection and confirmation of the external information terminal board 750 is not impaired.

The information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (1) has mounting components located on the respective axes of the operation shaft 754L and the operation shaft 755L, whereas the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) has the operation shaft 754L. The mounting component is located on the axis. The resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 ride on the axis of the operating shaft 754L of the short operating lever 754, and the operating shaft 75 of the long operating lever 755.
It is placed at a position not on the 5L axis. From another point of view, the resistor 765 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operating lever 754, and the photocoupler 766 has a photocoupler 766.
It is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operating lever 755. This will result in
In the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the information output terminal 753, the resistor 765, and the photocoupler 766 can be arranged at high density without affecting the operability.
Therefore, the external information terminal board 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compactly. Further, the arrangement of the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 with respect to the information output terminal 753 suggests which side the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755 are located with respect to the information output terminal 753. Further, the photocoupler 766 and the resistance 76 for the information output terminal 753
Since the arrangement of 5 secures the same level of space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755, the workability of inspection and confirmation of the external information terminal board 750 is not impaired.

In the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2), a resistor 765 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754, and a photocoupler is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. Although the 766 is arranged, the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operating lever 755, both the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766. As a result, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment has an operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation) while arranging the information output terminal 753, the resistor 765, and the photocoupler 766 at high density. Sufficient operability is ensured for the lever 755).

In the external information terminal board 750, when the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 are arranged on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754, the resistor 765, which is a short component, is used as a tall component. From the viewpoint of operability, it is desirable to arrange it on the information output terminal 753 side from 766.

When the parts paired with the information output terminal 753 are arranged on the operation unit side of the information output terminal 753, the external information terminal board 750 displays the operation unit display 762 between the information output terminal 753 and the paired parts. indicate. At this time, the operation unit display 762 functions as a correspondence relationship display that clearly shows the correspondence relationship between the information output terminal 753 and the component paired with the information output terminal 753.

The resistor 765 shown in FIGS. 102 (1) and 102 (2) is arranged so that the first color band 543 faces the first terminal 767 side of the photocoupler 766. Since the first terminal 767 of the photocoupler 766 is specified by the first terminal symbol 759, the resistor 765 is arranged so that the first color band 543 faces the first terminal symbol 759 side of the photocoupler 766. Can be rephrased as.

The resistor 765 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. For example, the resistance 765 has four color bands, the first number indicated by the first color band 543, the second number indicated by the second color band, the multiplier indicated by the third color band, and the fourth color band. Indicates the nominal resistance tolerance indicated by. Therefore, the resistance 765 can enhance the ease of confirmation as the resistance 765 by facilitating the confirmation of the first color band 543. The resistor 765 displays the first color band 543 on the side where the color band spacing is narrow, and displays the fourth color band on the side where the color band spacing is wide.

Such an arrangement of the resistors 765 facilitates the discovery of incorrect arrangements of the resistors 765 and the optocoupler 766.
The resistor 765 is an example of a passive element whose rating is displayed by a color code.
As long as it is a passive element whose rating is displayed by a color code, it can be applied to other passive elements included in the isolation means. Further, the photocoupler 766 is an example of a relay element in which the first terminal is specified by the first terminal symbol, and is included in the isolation means if the relay element in which the first terminal is specified by the first terminal symbol. It can also be applied to other relay elements.

Next, the external information terminal board of the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the external information terminal board of the second modification of the seventh embodiment.

The external information terminal board 770 includes an external information terminal board 771, a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 758. The external information terminal board 771 has a connector 752.
And the information output terminal 753 and the photocoupler 758 are mounted on the component mounting surface. The external information terminal board 770 includes one connector 752 (T1). The external information terminal board 770 is connected to the game control device 100 via a harness connected to the connector 752.

The information output terminal 753 is a terminal capable of outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information terminal board 770 has 10 information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10).
Are prepared in a row. Five information output terminals 753 from CN1 to CN5 and CN6 to CN
The five information output terminals 753 of 10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 771 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is set wider than the arrangement interval with other information output terminals 753. The gap between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is 10 information output terminals 753.
It can be used as a guide for confirming the position of. The 10 information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) are easily identified by being given different colors.

The external information terminal board 770 includes 10 photocouplers 758 (PC1 to PC10) in a row. The ten photocouplers 758 from PC1 to PC10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 771 at equal intervals. However, 10 photocouplers 758 are 1
It is arranged closer to the zero information output terminals 753.

As a result, the external information terminal board 771 can be configured to be more compact than the external information terminal board 751 by the amount corresponding to the hatched portion shown in the figure. Although the external information terminal board 771 has 10 photocouplers 758 aggregated and arranged, other passive elements constituting the isolation means may be aggregated and arranged. It is desirable that the 10 information output terminals 753 are arranged in the same manner as the external information terminal board 751 from the viewpoint of ensuring their operability.
It may be aggregated and arranged in the same manner as the photocoupler 758. When the external information terminal board 771 becomes non-rectangular due to the region (corresponding to the hatched portion shown in the figure) that becomes unnecessary due to aggregation, it is desirable to arrange the region that becomes unnecessary due to aggregation at a position far from the connector 752. The compactly configured external information terminal board 770 improves the degree of freedom of arrangement in the gaming machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (including a modification) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an external information terminal board (for example, an external information terminal board 750) capable of outputting information to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The external information terminal board is provided with an information output terminal (for example, information output terminal 753) to which an electric wire can be connected by operating a lever portion (for example, a short operation lever 754 and a long operation lever 755), and an information output terminal. A board (for example, an external information terminal board 751) is provided. The board has an information output terminal arrangement position (for example, component shape display 760) and a lever operation position (for example, operation unit display 76).
2) is included in the display content of the arrangement surface on which the information output terminal is arranged (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

(2) The external information terminal board of (1) has two or more information output terminals (for example, information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10)) and an isolation means (for example, for example) that insulates the external device from the gaming machine. A photocoupler 766) is provided for each information output terminal. On the board, a pair of information output terminals and isolation means are arranged side by side on an operation shaft (for example, an operation shaft 754L) of a lever portion of the information output terminal (see FIG. 100 (2)).

(3) The external information terminal board of (1) includes an information output terminal and an isolation means (for example, an information output terminal 753) that insulates the external device from the gaming machine. For the information output terminal, the first wire of the one-to-two wires is the first lever portion (for example, the long operation lever 755).
), And the second electric wire can be connected by the operation of the second lever portion (for example, the short operation lever 754). The range of motion of the first lever portion is non-interfering only by the first height (for example, height h4) from the arrangement surface, and the range of motion of the second lever portion is the first height from the arrangement surface. Only a second height (eg, height h3) greater than is non-interfering. The substrate is disposed with the isolation means closer to the second lever portion than the first lever portion (FIG. 10).
See 0 (2)).

(4) The external information terminal board of (1) includes an information output terminal and an isolation means for insulating the external device from the gaming machine. The isolation means is a relay element (eg, a relay element).
It includes a photocoupler 766) and a passive element (eg, resistor 765) whose rating is indicated by a color code. On the substrate, the passive element and the relay element are arranged side by side with the first color band of the color code of the passive element facing the first terminal of the relay element (see FIG. 102).

(5) The external information terminal board (for example, the external information terminal board 770) of (1) includes an information output terminal and an isolation means for insulating the external device from the gaming machine. The isolation means includes an isolation means component element (for example, a relay element such as a photocoupler 766 or a passive element such as a resistor 765). The substrate integrates the isolation means constituent elements as compared with the arrangement of the information output terminals (see FIG. 103).

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment uses the irradiation light from the backlight of the liquid crystal display device to improve workability in the gaming machine installation environment. First, the arrangement environment of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 104 shows how the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main body frame) 11. The gaming machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and the front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is excellent in maintenance workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent gaming machines, since the amount of protrusion of the front side component of the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) is large, the front frame 12 is used for the game hall equipment (for example, the calling lamp). Or, it may interfere with the card unit or the like, and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited. The outer frame 11 allows the front frame 12 to be opened and closed with the left side as the rotation axis, but may be openable with the right side as the rotation axis.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back surface side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 housed in a board box facing the connector connection portion. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 housed in a board box facing the connector connection portion. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, 514 facing the back surface side from the front frame 12. Various substrates 512, 513, 514 are
A control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, a relay board 70), another board (for example, an LED board or a sensor board), and the like. Further, the front frame 12 makes the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened, so that the game control board 510 and the effect control board 511 can be visually recognized.
, Supports various substrates 512,513,514.

The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control board 510, an effect control board 511, and various boards 512,5.
13,514 are electrically connected by a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the boards or a power line for transmitting power between the boards.

The front frame 12 is provided with various substrates and a harness connected to the substrate (not shown) facing the back surface side. The front frame 12 may have a substrate or a harness facing the back side via a protective cover (not shown).

The gaming machine 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 780 with the display unit facing the front side. The liquid crystal display device 780 includes an opening for facing the display unit on the front side and a plurality of slits 781 and 782 for leaking the irradiation light from the backlight to the back side.

Next, the liquid crystal display device 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal display device according to the eighth embodiment.
The liquid crystal display device 780 includes a housing 738 and 787, a liquid crystal panel 785, and a backlight 7.
Includes 86. The housing 783 and the housing 787 form a box body (substantially rectangular parallelepiped) by fitting, and house the liquid crystal panel 785 and the backlight 786 inside. The housing 783 is provided facing the front side of the gaming machine 10, and the housing 787 is provided facing the back side of the gaming machine 10. Housing 78
Reference numeral 3 is a frame shape having a front opening 784, and the display area of the liquid crystal panel 785 is covered by the gaming machine 1.
It faces the front side of 0 from the front opening 784.

The liquid crystal panel 785 is provided with the backlight 786 on the back side, and the backlight 78 is provided.
An image is displayed in the display area using the irradiation light from 6. The backlight 786 includes a light source (not shown), a light diffusing means, and the like, and irradiates the liquid crystal panel 785 with light having a uniform illuminance. The housing 787 has a box shape and accommodates and protects the liquid crystal panel 785 and the backlight 786. Further, the housing 787 covers the back surface side of the liquid crystal panel 785 so that the backlight 786 efficiently irradiates the liquid crystal panel 785 with light. Multiple housings 787 (for example, three)
Slits (upper slits) 781 are provided in a row at the top, and a plurality of (for example, three) slits (lower slits) 782 are provided in a row at the bottom.

The slit 781 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper edge portion of the housing 783, and the slit 782 is provided at a position corresponding to the lower edge portion of the housing 783. Therefore, slits 781 and 78
2 is provided so as to avoid the back surface of the front opening 784 of the housing 783. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 780 can display a suitable image even if it has slits 781 and 782.

The slits 781 and 782 can leak a part of the irradiation light of the backlight 786 from the opening to the back side of the gaming machine 10.
Next, the arrangement relationship between the liquid crystal display device 780, the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a cross section passing through one of the lower slits in the liquid crystal display device, the game control device, and the effect control device.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 788, and the game control device 10 is provided via the mounting base 788.
Supports 0 and the effect control device 300. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300
And may be supported by separate mounting bases.

The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent member. The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a component mounting surface on the front surface and a solder surface on the back surface. Game control board 5
Reference numeral 10 includes a required number of connectors 794 and components on the component mounting surface. The connector 794 faces the outside of the board box 520 from an opening window provided in the board box 520, and can be connected to a predetermined harness by a connector.

The effect control device 300 accommodates the effect control board 511 in the board box 790. The substrate box 790 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent member. The game control board 511 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a multi-layer board having a front surface, a back surface, and a component mounting surface. The effect control board 511 includes a required number of connectors 791 and components. The connector 791 faces the outside of the board box 790 from an opening window provided in the board box 790, and can be connected to a predetermined harness by a connector.

The liquid crystal display device 780 is supported by the front frame 12 via a mounting base (not shown). The liquid crystal display device 780 may be supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 788, similarly to the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300.

The liquid crystal display device 780 includes a slit 782 having a height w1. The liquid crystal display device 780 is
A backlight 786 is arranged on the extension of the opening of the slit 782 so that light can be suitably leaked from the slit to the back surface side of the gaming machine 10. Further, the liquid crystal display device 780 has a slit 78.
The display area of the liquid crystal panel 785 is prevented from being positioned on the extension of the opening of 2, and the slit 782 is prevented from impairing the visibility of the image. Further, the liquid crystal display device 780 has a slit 78.
The upper edge portion of the housing 783 is arranged on the extension of the opening of No. 2 so that the slit 782 cannot be visually recognized from the front view of the liquid crystal display device 780.

The light leaking from the slit 782 irradiates the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 within the range of the light rays L1 and L2. The gaming machine 10 arranges a gap (width w2) between the gaming control device 100 and the effect control device 300 in the irradiation range of the light leaking from the slit 782. Since the mounting base 788 is composed of a transparent member, the light leaking from the slit 782 passes through the mounting base 788 and is transmitted to the gaming machine 10.
Irradiate the back side of. Further, since the substrate box 520 is composed of a transparent member, the light leaking from the slit 782 passes through the substrate box 520 and illuminates the game control substrate 510 and the connector 794. Further, since the substrate box 790 is composed of a transparent member, the light leaking from the slit 782 passes through the substrate box 790 and illuminates the effect control substrate 511 and the connector 791. The leaked light from such a slit 782 irradiates the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 within a range (width w3) that is not shielded by the gaming control substrate 510 or the effect control substrate 511.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the gaming control device 100 due to the light leaking from the slit 782.
And the effect control device 300 can be easily observed. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the gaming control board 510 and the effect control board 511 by the light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the connector 791 and the connector 794 by the light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a connector 7 due to light leaking from the slit 782.
It facilitates observation of the harness connected to the 91 and the harness connected to the connector 794. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of other ranges on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 by the light leaking from the slit 782. Such a gaming machine 10 has a simple configuration and improves workability in a gaming machine installation environment. Although the slit 782 has been described, the slit 781 can also improve the workability in the gaming machine installation environment in other ranges.

Next, the cable (harness) routing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of cable routing of the game control device according to the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has a slit irradiation light observation region 796 in the hatched range in the vicinity of the gaming control device 100 because the substrate box 510 transmits the light leaking from the slit 782 and the gaming control substrate 510 blocks the light. The gaming machine 10 sets the harness connected to the connector 894 of the gaming control device 100 within the range of the cable routing area 797. The cable routing area 797 is realized by restricting the routing direction of the harness in which the locking portions 798 and 799 are connected to the connector 894 of the game control device 100. The cable routing region 797 is on the game control board 510 and above the connector disposition region. This prevents the harness connected to the connector 894 of the game control device 100 from covering the slit irradiation light observation area 796. In the gaming machine 10, all cables are in the slit irradiation light observation area 796.
It does not require that it does not interfere with. The gaming machine 10 allows a necessary cable to interfere with the slit irradiation light observation area 796, and limits unnecessary cables from interfering with the slit irradiation light observation area 796.

Next, a modification 1 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of how the game control board of the first modification of the eighth embodiment looks when observed.
The game control board 800 includes an information display area 801 at the end. The information display area 801 is
The information display pattern 802 formed by the conductor pattern is provided in the solid portion of the GND pattern surrounded by the GND pattern 803. For example, information display pattern 802
Displays the manufacturer name "Kou Co., Ltd.". The information display pattern 802 is not limited to the manufacturer name, but may be other information such as a manufacturer name, a board control number, and the like, and is not limited to one.
It may include the above information.

The GND pattern 803 and the information display pattern 802 block the irradiation light from the back surface, but
The GND pattern solid-free portion transmits a part of the irradiation light from the back surface. Information display area 801
Is arranged in the region of the slit irradiation light observation region 804 in which the light leaking from the slit 782 is irradiated from the back surface. As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to observe the information display pattern 802 by relying on the light leaking from the slit 782 when the light source that illuminates the surface of the gaming control board 800 cannot be relied on.

Next, the second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a slit irradiation target of the second modification of the eighth embodiment.
The slit 781 irradiates the ball flow path 810 of the gaming machine 10 from the back surface by the leaked light. The spherical flow path 810 includes a transmission observation window (transmission window) 811 that transmits light from the back surface to the front surface. The transmitted light transmitted through the transmission observation window 811 is shielded by the game ball flowing down the ball flow path 810. Therefore, the slit 781 makes it possible to observe the flowing state of the game ball in the ball flow path 810 even in a dark place.

In the gaming machine 10, the observation target due to the light leaking from the slit 781 is the sphere flow path 810, but the observation target is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 can observe other structures (for example, moving parts such as decorative devices, ball feeding devices, etc.) whose operating state can be confirmed by the light leaking from the slit 781.

As described above, the light leaking from the slits 781 and 782 can improve the workability in the gaming machine installation environment with a simple configuration without deteriorating the lighting performance of the original purpose. The slit 78
The positions, shapes, and numbers of 1,782 may be arbitrarily changed.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a gap between a liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 780), a first substrate (for example, a game control substrate 510) arranged on the back side, and the first substrate. A second substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 511) arranged on the back side thereof is included. The liquid crystal display device has a liquid crystal panel (for example, a liquid crystal panel 785), a backlight (for example, a backlight 786) that is a light source of the liquid crystal panel, and a liquid crystal panel facing from a front opening (for example, a front opening 784) and backing. A housing that houses the light (eg, housing 783)
787) and is included. The housing is provided with slits (for example, slits 781 and 782) that leak the emitted light from the backlight to the back side at a position facing the gap between the first substrate and the second substrate (see FIG. 106).

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded.
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the description above.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

A liquid crystal display device arranged with the display unit facing the front side,
The first substrate arranged on the back side and
A second substrate having a gap with the first substrate and arranged on the back surface side,
Including
The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal panel, a backlight that serves as a light source for the liquid crystal panel, and a housing that allows the liquid crystal panel to face from a front opening and accommodates the backlight.
The light of the backlight faces from the gap between the first substrate and the second substrate.
Pachinko machine.

Images